Skip to main content

Full text of "The studio and what to do in it"

See other formats


II 


THe 

UNIY6RS1TY  Of  CALlfORNIA      TILINE 
LIBRARY 

COPI 


Optical 
)   maintai; 

if-idity. 

J6s.;  10  b 


RY! 


with  a  stop  it  easily  covers  a  10  by  S  plate  to  the 
corners,  which  is  larger  than  that  engraved  on  the 
mount  as  its  possibility.  Working  as  it  does  with 
such  a  LARGE  APERTURE  (F/6  approx.),  it 
serves  as  a  portrait  and  group  lens,  as  well  as  a 
andscape  and  copying  objective.  There  is  no 
doubt  of  its  proving  a  -nost  USEFUL  LENS. 
J.  TRAIL  TAYLOR,  Btit.  Jrnl.  of  Photography. 

PERKEN,  SON,  &  PAYMENT, 


ngle  work 
ire?  are 
|  interior 
nee  of  dis 


ILINEi 

ipidity, 
md  views 

i    the   C4{ 

L. 

«ETR 

hitecture;; 
the  subj ; 


PORT 

osures  in 
ined  by 


d  upon  ti 
Rectiline:: 

review  is  really  an  excellent  insfrumjj 
Photfigra.} 

PORTRAIT  LENS.— "The  «j 
LENSES  are  MODERATE  in  pri4 
most  EXCELLENT  results." 

Amateur  Phci 


TRADE 


MARK. 


WIDE-ANGLE    CAMERA   (LONG  Focus). 

Price,  including  Three  Double  Dark  Slides. 

4iby3j    5  by  4    6j'by«|    ft  by  6£     10  by  8    12  by  10     15  by  12 
140s.       146s.      \165tJ  188s.          235s.        288s,        350s. 

"  In  this  Camera,  wiuch  is  RIGID  and  PORTABLE  the  focus- 
sing screen  can  be  brought  forward  close  to*  the  front  c«  baseboard, 
so  as  to  avoid  obstruction  when  using  lenses  qfshrt  focus.  It  is 
provided  with  DOUBLE  SWING  arrangement  and  LONG  focus- 
sing adjustment  by  quick  acting  rack.  When  closed  i  tie  lens  may 
remain  attached  to  the  front  and  project  through  the  TURN- 
TABLE."— British  Journal  Photographic  Almanac. 

PAYMENT'S  CAMERA  (LONG  Focus.) 

Price  includes  Three  Double  Dark  Slides. 
4i  by  3J    6J  by  4f    8$  by  6£     10  by  8    12  by  10   *15  by  12 

120s.        145S.          168s.          212s.        258s.          314R. 
"  The  '  Rayment '  Camera    in  particular  claims  attention,  both 
for  its  BEAUTY  OF  WORKMANSHIP  and  for  the  EASE  and 
READINESS    with    which   it    can    be   put   into   action."—  The 
Camera. 

'OPTIMUS'  CAMERA  (LONG  Focus.) 

Prire  includes  Three  Double  Dark  Slides. 


4J  by  3J 
130s. 


10  by  8 
227s. 


12  by  10 
275s. 


137s.  175S. 

"  I  should  strongly  recommend  Rayment's  Camera.  It  is 
LIGHT,  COMPACT,  very  RIGID,  and  extends  to  about  double 
the  usual  focus."— Amateur  Photographer. 


"OPTIMUS 

CATALOGUES 
POST  FREE, 


i  Lantern  is  efficient  for  Exhibitions, 
ns  gives  crisp  definition,  being  a  superior 
natic  Photographic  Combination,  with 
md-Pinion,  Compound  Condenser  of  4  in. 
er,  8-wick  Refulgent  Lamp. 

£    »•     d. 

iteinBox        1  10    0 

any  outside  body      2     20 

any  outside  body,  Panelled 
,  Brass  Stages  and  Sliding 


i  Iron  Body,  Brass  Sliding 
?erforated)     ... 


420 

250 
2  10    O 


MAGIC  LANTERNS. 

BI-UNIAL. 

.    -j 

£    s.     d. 

Panelled  Mahogany  Body  and 
Moulded  Foot,  Ach>onoati<s£~a6tp- 
graphic  Front  Lenses,  Compound 
Condensers,  Brass  Stages  and 
Sliding  Tubes  ...  '...  ...  8  80 


LANTERN. 

...  14  10    0 


All  Brass  Mounts    , 


Lantern  PHOTOGRAPHS— Plain,  12s. 
Coloured,  18s.  6d.  doz. 


KEN,  SON,  &  RUMEN!, 


LONDON. 


OO.'S 

DRY    PLATES 

Manufactured  at   their    Works — Southgate. 
Made    in    3    Rapidities: — 

ORDINARY.   RAPID.   INSTANTANEOU! 

(Yellow  label.)  (White  label.)  (Chocolate  label.) 

For    Quality    of    Emulsion,   Thickness  and    Evenness   of    Coatin 
Rapidity  and  Uniformity,  these  plates  cannot  be  excelled. 


THE    LARGEST   STOCK   OF   MODERN   AND   ARTISTIC 

TORIES  &  BACKGKC 

Are  on  View  at  Marion's  Show  Booms. 


ACCESSORIES  &  BACKaKOUND> 


MARION'S    MOUNTS 

(Manufactured  at  their  Factory,  Courbevoie,  Paris} 

ARE   STILL  THE   BEST. 

The  Purest  Materials  and  Finest  Surface  Papers  used  in  the  Mam1 
facture.     New  Patterns  on  application. 


Sole  Agents  for  Great  Britain  and  the  Colonies  for 

VOIGTLANDER   &   SON'S 

CELEBRATED  EURYSCOPE! 

For  large  direct  Portraits  &  Groups     The  Rapid  Euryscope. 
For    General  View,     Group,    and 

Portrait  Work        ......    The  Medium  Rapid. 

For  Ordinary  Portrait  Work         ...     The  Portrait  Euryscope, 
For  Groups  in  confined  situations...     The  Rapid  Wide-  Angle. 

For  Architectural  Work  ......    The  Wide-Angle  Euryscoj 


22  &  23,  SOHO  SQUARE,  LONDON 


THE    STUDIO, 

AND    WHAT    TO    DO    IN    IT. 


THE    STUDIO: 


AND 


WH-A.T     TO     DO     IN     IT 


H.      P.      ROBINSON, 


AUTHOR     OF 


"Pictorial    Effect    in    Photography''    ^Picture   Making   by 
Photography"    &c.,  &c. 


LONDON: 
PIPER  &  CARTER,  5,  FURNIVAL  STREET,  HOLBORN,  E.G. 

1891. 


LONDON : 
PIPER    ANB    CARTER,    PRINTERS,    FURMVAL    STREET,    HOLBORN,   t.C. 


».I  •     • 


PREFACE. 


MY  little  books  on  the  Art  side  of  photography  have  been 
received  with  so  much  favour,  that  I  venture  to  add  another 
to  the  number.  "  PICTORIAL  EFFECT  "  treated  of  art  principles ; 
"  PICTUEE  MAKING  "  of  the  application  of  those  principles  to 
out-door  photography ;  the  present  work  is  chiefly  concerned 
with  portraiture. 

For  in-door  work  a  studio  is  essential.  There  have  been  so 
many  different  forms  of  studios  invented,  designed,  or  modified 
from  others,  that  when  a  photographer  wishes  to  build  a  studio, 
and  turns  to  the  authorities  for  information  and  guidance,  he 
finds  something  very  like  chaos,  for  in  the  multitude  of  coun- 
cillors there  is — confusion.  In  the  following  chapters  I  have 
briefly  described  the  leading  types  of  studios,  and  devoted  a 
chapter  to  a  description  of  what  a  very  long  and  varied 
experience,  and  the  building  of  half-a-dozen  studios  for  myself, 
and  the  designing  of  a  large  number  for  my  friends,  confirm  me 
in  thinking  the  best. 

Throughout  the  book  I  have  not  attempted  to  recommend 
anything  that  is  desirable  but  impossible,  or  to  decry  anything 
that  I  feel  is  not  quite  correct,  but  yet  is  part  of  the  photo- 

395901 


VI  PREFACE. 


grapher's  business  to  employ.  For  instance,  I  quite  agree  with 
the  late  Mr.  Norman  Macbeth,  whose  advice  on  art  was  always 
sound,  that  as  the  portrait  is  derived  directly  from  living  subjects, 
so  should  the  backgrounds  and  surroundings  be  composed  of  real 
objects ;  but  I  know  that  in  the  practical  business  of  a  portrait 
photographer,  it  would  be  next  to  impossible  to  compass  this 
desirable  result,  and  therefore  I  have  admitted  the  use  of 
painted  screens.  The  chapters  on  Posing  and  the  Managemeut 
of  the  Sitter  embody  the  result  of  twenty-five  years  of  daily 
work  in  the  studio,  and  I  trust  will  be  of  use  to  the  professional 
photographer;  and  the  concluding  chapters  will,  I  hope,  aid 
him  in  other  departments  of  his  profession. 

Although  the  great  bulk  of  the  book  is  new,  I  must  acknow- 
ledge that  some  of  the  chapters  have  already  appeared  in  the 
pages  of  the  Photographic  News,  a  journal  which,  without 
neglecting  the  strictly  scientific  detail  upon  which  mechanical 
photography  depends,  has  always  urged  upon  photographers  the 
study  of  art  as  of  even  more  vital  importance  to  success  in  their 
profession  than  science,  which,  after  all,  is  only  a  similar  means 
to  a  picture-making  end  as  colour-making  is  to  painters. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

CHAPTER  I. 
VARIOUS  FORMS  OF  STUDIOS         1 

CHAPTER  II. 
THE  BEST  FORM  OF  STUDIO          12 

CHAPTER  III. 
BACKGROUNDS 22 

CHAPTER  IV. 
ACCESSORIES 31 

CHAPTER  V. 
LIGHTING  THE  SITTER         37 

CHAPTER  VI. 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER— THE  HEAD  ...    44 

CHAPTER  VII. 

POSING   AND   THE   MANAGEMENT  OF  THE   SITTER — THE  HEAD 
VIGNETTE          i        50 

CHAPTER  VHL 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER— THE  THREE- 
QUARTER  LENGTH— MEN        57 

CHAPTER  IX. 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER— THE  THREE- 
QUARTER  LENGTH — LADIES    62 

CHAPTER  X. 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER — FULL-LENGTH 
FIGURES  ...  69 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  XL 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER —GROUPS        ...    74 

CHAPTER  XII. 

POSING   AND    THE    MANAGEMENT  OF   THE    SITTER — OUT-DOOR 
GROUPS 80 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER— CHILDREN     ...    86 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

POSING  AND  THE   MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER — EXPRESSION 
IN  PORTRAITURE          93 

CHAPTER  XV. 

POSING  AND  THE   MANAGEMENT   OF  THE  SITTER-— SUGGESTION 
AND  INTERFERENCE  IN  POSING          99 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

SMILES  AND  SMILING         104 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
LIKENESS — FAMILIAR  AND  OCCULT          109 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 
RETOUCHING  ...         116 

CHAPTER  XIX. 
HINTS  TO  SITTERS 122 

CHAPTER  XX. 

How  TO  SHOW  PHOTOGRAPHS       126 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
THE  ITINERANT  PAINTER 132 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

THE  EDUCATION  OF  A  PHOTOGRAPHER  .  136 


THE    STUDIO, 

AND    WHAT    TO    DO    IN    IT. 


CHAPTEE  I, 

VARIOUS    FORMS    OF    STUDIOS, 

THE  possession  of  a  good  studio  goes  quite  half  way  to  the  pro- 
duction of  good  work,  and  its  design  and  construction  have  been 
a  matter  of  anxious  thought  and  earnest  enquiry  from  the 
earliest  times  of  the  art.  A  clever  operator  will,  of  course,  get 
presentable  pictures  even  under  difficulties,  and  it  follows  that 
bad  workmen  will  do  bad  work,  however  good  their  tools  may  be ; 
but  I  hold  that  those  who  exercise  any  art  should  never  have 
their  attention  distracted  from  their  work  by  defect  of  their 
appliances,  and  the  studio  to  a  portrait  photographer  is  an 
appliance  of  the  utmost  importance.  I  propose,  therefore,  to 
give  a  rapid  sketch  of  the  most  important  of  the  many  forms  of 
studios  that  have  been  erected  or  proposed.  Some  of  them  may 
have  individual  advantages  not  possessed  by  others,  while  in 
many  cases  the  form  of  studio  adopted  must  be  determined  by 
the  space  available ;  but  from  all  of  them  it  is  possible  that  a 
photographer  about  to  build  or  alter  a  studio  may  get  hints  that 
may  be  of  use  to  him.  I  shall  then  give  plans  and  descriptions 
of  a  studio  that  I  know  from  experience  offers  the  greatest 
advantages  for  e very-day  work. 

It  is  a  peculiarity  of  photographers  to  invent  modifications  -r 


x ;  i£:  •*!  *V;j£    J  A  T?E  STUDIO. 


this  has  not  been  confined  to  the  chemical  processes  only,  but 
has  extended  to  the  studios  in  which  those  processes  are 
employed.  The  forms  of  studios — or  glass-rooms,  as  they  were 
originally  called — have  exercised  the  ingenuity  of  their  devisers 
from  the  time  of  the  discovery  of  photography.  At  first,  as  the 
name  implies,  as  much  glass  as  possible  was  employed,  and  when 
a  clear  space  could  be  got  for  the  erection,  the  studio  was  all 
glass.  As  time  went  on,  experience  taught  that  a  portrait  could 
be  taken  as  quickly  and  with  better  results  when  less  illumina- 
tion was  employed,  and  the  area  of  the  space  admitting  light 
has  been  gradually  reduced  until  a  very  little  light,  properly 
directed,  is  now  found  sufficient  for  most  purposes.  The  forms 
taken  by  studios  have  been  very  numerous,  and  in  some  cases 
quite  fantastic,  and  have  ranged  in  cost  and  style  from  that  of 
Aladdin's  Palace  to  the  meanest  shanty.  They  have  taken 
that  of  the  "lean-to,"  the  ridge  roof,  the  tunnel  with  many 
variations,  and  amongst  the  eccentric  kinds  have  been  a 
revolving  studio,  another  looking  like  a  gigantic  accordion ; 
and  at  one  time,  a  domed  or  circular  roof  was  strongly  advocated, 
under  the  erroneous  impression  that  the  curves  of  the  dome  would 
concentrate  the  light,  and  make  it  more  powerful.  In  addition 
to  this,  it  was  once  thought  that,  as  effective  light  was  composed 
of  the  blue  rays  of  the  spectrum,  blue  glass  would  give  more 
light,  and  photographers  glazed  their  studios  with  blue  glass. 
The  ghastly  effect  on  the  sitter  may  be  guessed,  but  the 
advantages  were  not  easily  to  be  seen. 

THE  LEAN-TO. — Of  all  these  designs,  the  lean-to  and  the 
ridge-roof,  or  some  modifications  of  them  to  suit  the  position 
in  which  they  are  to  be  erected,  are  the  only  ones  which  have 
retained  the  favour  of  photographers. 

The  lean-to  is  the  most  simple,  and,  where  it  can  be  built 
against  a  high  wall  to  protect  it  from  the  sun,  one  of  the  most 
effective.  It  is  particularly  suited  to  small  studios,  those  that 
are  not  more  than  11  or  12  feet  wide.  It  is  not  necessary  to 


VARIOUS   FORMS    OF   STUDIOS. 


have  the  roof  entirely  of  glass.  The  following  section  gives  the 
lines  of  a  very  useful  small  studio,  that  could  be  put  up  at  very 
little  expense.  If  made  about  25  feet  long,  it  would  be  found 
all  that  an  amateur  could  desire.  As  a  matter  of  lighting,  I 
should  prefer  to  omit  the  side  light,  and  have  the  side  solid,  and 
two  feet  lower  ;  the  light  would  then  come  from  a  low  roof;  but 
there  are  other  things  to  think  of.  In  so  narrow  a  studio,  there 
would  not.  be  room  for  a  full- sized  background,  which  should 

I 


never  be  less  than  8  feet  high ;  and  if  the  door  is  in  the  side, 
6  feet  6  inches  does  not  afford  any  too  much  height. 

The  RIDGE-ROOF  is  practically  the  same  as  the  lean-to, 
differing  only  in  the  construction  of  the  roof.  As  the  studio  I 
shall  describe  in  detail  further  on  is  a  modification  of  the  ridge- 
roof,  I  need  not  further  describe  it  here. 

Some  of  the  earliest  studios  in  London  and  other  large  towns 
were  made  by  removing  part  of  the  roof  of  the  garret  of  a  house, 
and  replacing  it  with  glass  ;  and  much  excellent  work  has  been 
done  in  these  glass-rooms  under  most  trying  circumstances.  Of 
studios  built  under  these  conditions,  that  of  the  late  T.  R. 
Williams,  of  Regent  Street,  is  a  typical  example.  Many  photo- 
graphers will  remember  that,  in  many  qualities,  and  especially 
in  delicacy  and  roundness  of  the  perfect  modelling,  Williams's 
work  was  at  the  time  unequalled.  For  years  his  portraits  were 
the  wonder,  envy,  and  admiration  of  all  photographers.  "Without 
recommending  it  for  imitation,  except  where  the  exigencies  of 
the  situation  make  it  necessary,  I  think  an  illustration  and 


THE   STUDIO. 


description  of  this  studio,  written  when  "Williams  was  at  the 
height  of  his  fame,  may  be  of  interest  to  my  readers,  especially 
as  it  shows  to  what  an  extent  blinds  have  to  be  used  when  good 
work  has  to  be  done  under  such  worrying  circumstances  a& 
trouble  the  photographer  when  his  studio  is  full  in  the  sun. 
The  size  of  the  room  is  about  30  feet  long  by  17  feet  wide.  As 
will  be  seen  from  the  woodcut,  the  chief  light  is  from  a  skylight, 
sloping  in  direction  of  the  length  of  the  room,  not,  as  in  the 
ordinary  lean-to :roof,  in  direction  of  the  width.  The  height  at 
the  ridge  is  about  16  feet,  at  the  eaves  8  feet.  The  glass  cover& 


the  whole  of  the  longer  side  of  the  roof.  The  panes  at  the  end 
of  the  room  are  generally  covered  with  blinds,  so  that  the  room 
is  lighted  entirely  from  a  skylight  facing  the  south-west. 

The  sitter  and  the  camera  are  placed  cross-corner-wise  of  the 
room,  two  backgrounds,  one  facing  each  corner  towards  the 
light,  being  generally  placed  as  fixtures.  Some  of  these  details 
are  omitted  in  the  sketch,  to  give  a  clearer  view  of  the  interior. 
Movable  wings,  covered  with  blue  calico,  are  placed  at  each  side 
of  the  background,  and  at  times  are  made  to  cut  off  direct  light, 
and  at  others  to  act  as  reflecting  screens.  The  skylight  is 
furnished  with  three  sets  of  blinds,  each  set  consisting  of  three 


VARIOUS   FORMS   OF   STUDIOS. 


blinds,  one  above  another — one  of  dark  blue  calico,  one  of  thick 
white  calico,  and  another  of  thin  white  calico,  or  jaconet  muslin. 
By  the  judicious  management  of  these  blinds  almost  any  effect 
of  lighting  can  be  obtained.  The  diagram  illustrates  a  mode  of 
arrangement  often  used.  Over  one-third  of  the  skylight,  and 
half  of  the  next  third,  the  dark  blue  blinds  are  drawn,  to  exclude 
almost  all  light ;  over  the  other  half  of  the  middle  section  a  white 
blind  is  drawn,  and  also  over  the  upper  half  of  the  remaining 
third.  One-sixth  of  the  skylight,  and  that  the  position  most 
remote  from  the  sitter,  admits  the  light  through  clear  glass  ;  and 
this,  if  the  sun  were  shining,  would  be  covered  with  the  thin 
muslin  blind.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  principal  light  is  often 
virtually  a  concentrated  high  side-light,  the  concentration  giving 
effective  cast  shadows,  whilst  the  amount  of  softened  light 
admitted  through  thin  blinds  lights  up  the  shadows,  preventing 
blackness  and  hardness.  Besides  the  blinds  already  described, 
there  are  two  other  dark  blinds,  which  can,  on  occasion,  be  used. 
They  are  tolerably  near  to  the  head  of  the  sitter,  and  can  be  used 
to  prevent  any  vertical  light  reaching  it.  All  the  blinds  are  on 
spring  rollers,  placed  near  the  top  of  the  skylight,  and  can  be 
readily  drawn  so  as  to  cover  any  required  portion  of  the  roof. 

The  position  and  form  of  this  studio  could  scarcely  have  been 
more  awkward,  or  presented  more  difficulties  to  the  operator, 
while  the  complication  of  three  sets  of  blinds,  besides  screens, 
was  enough  to  confuse  any  photographer ;  but  it  was  in  the  hands 
of  an  exceedingly  able  man,  who  produced  some  of  the  most 
delicate  work  that  the  world,  up  to  that  time,  had  seen ;  hence 
other  photographers,  mistaking,  as  they  often  do,  the  materials 
ior  the  man,  thought  that  success  lay  in  his  collodion  and  baths 
and  developers,  and  especially  in  his  glass-room.  This  led  to 
imitations  which  eventually  grew  into  the  many  forms  of  tunnel 
studios,  which  were  at  one  time  excessively  advocated,  but  soon 
abandoned. 

An  improvement  on  the  form  of  the  studio  just  described  is 


THE   STUDIO. 


shown  in  that  erected  by  an  American  photographer,  which 
admits  of  side  as  well  as  top  light.     After  the  description  given 


of  Williams's  studio,  the  illustration  will  speak  sufficiently  for 
itself. 

The  TUNNEL  STUDIO  is  an  illustration  of  the  mischief  clever 
photographers  sometimes  do  by  producing  beautiful  work  under 
difficult  circumstances.  Williams,  by  the  exercise  of  his  great 
natural  aptitude,  patience,  and  skill,  produces  pictures  with 
great  technical  beauties  of  light  and  shade..  Rejlander,  with  a 
modification  of  the  same  kind  of  lighting,  but  with  the  addition 
of  a  tunnel  in  which  to  place  his  camera,  realises  many  poetical 
ideas  in  photography;  other  photographers  at  once  jump  to  the 
conclusion  that  it  is  all  in  the  form  of  the  studio,  and  build 
tunnels.  Photographers,  as  I  have  already  said,  have  an  itching 
for  modifications,  and  a  mania  for  modifications  of  the  tunnel  set 
in.  Every  conceivable  variation  was  resorted  to  to  waste  the 
money  and  spoil  the  tempers  of  photographers.  The  end  of  it  all 
was,  that  every  photographer  who  could  afford  it  took  down  his 
costly  experiments,  and  returned  to  the  old-fashioned  oblong 
room  under  a  lean-to  or  ridge-roof.  But  it  is  well  that  anyone 
intending  to  construct  a  studio  should  at  least  hear  of  these 


VARIOUS   FORMS   OF  STUDIOS. 


experiments,  especially  as  one  of  the  objections  to  their  use — 
length  of  exposure — no  longer  exists. 

The  earliest  studios  of  this  description  seem  to  have  been  in 
form  something  like  the  Williams  studio,  but  very  much  smaller, 
and  with  a  dark  place  for  the  camera  attached,  from  which  they 
got  their  name.  Here  is  a  diagram  and  description  of  a  small 
one  erected  by  an  amateur.  The  total  length  is  28  feet ;  of  this, 
4  feet  at  each  side,  and  at  the  top  at  the  background  end  as  far 
as  the  ridge  b  B,  is  opaque,  10  feet  glass,  and  the  remaining 
portion,  or  tunnel,  14  feet  wood.  The  height  of  the  studio 
portion  is  11  feet  at  I,  and  7  feet  at  c,  and  10  feet  wide.  The 
portion  for  the  camera,  in  which  there  is  no  light,  is  8  feet  wide. 


A        B  C 

The  side  lights  on  each  side  have  glass  to  the  extent  of  10  feet 
by  7  feet.  The  roof  from  I  to  c  is  glass.  The  opaque  parts  of 
the  roof  are  of  zinc.  There  is  a  door  at  each  side  at  C,  each  of 
which,  being  opposite  the  other,  admits  of  ready  ventilation.  A 
small  dark  room  is  erected  in  the  unilluminated  portion.  The 
aspect  of  the  studio  is  such  that  the  sitter  faces  north-east,  the 
studio  having  on  the  north  and  east  an  uninterrupted  light,  whilst 
the  south  and  west  lights  are  considerably  excluded.  The 
blinds  are  so  arranged  that  light  can  be  admitted  from  the  right 
or  left  of  the  skylight  as  required. 

The  most  important  of  the  tunnel  studios,  and  the  one  which 
attracted  a  great  deal  of  attention  at  the  time,  was  one  erected  by 


8 


THE   STUDIO. 


Eejlander ;  it  will  be  seen  that  very  little  light  was  admitted,  a 
fault  which  would  not  be  much  felt  now  our  processes  are 
improved,  but  which  was  not  found  to  be  sufficient  in  the  days 
of  collodion  for  ordinary  portraiture,  and  the  light  came  from  one 
side  only,  a  fatal  objection.  Eejlander  was  famous  for  artistic 
studies,  and  one  of  the  most  striking  things  in  his  works  was  the 
great  command  he  appeared  to  have  over  the  lighting  of  the 
model.  Almost  every  variety  of  lighting  was  adopted  in  turn 
to  serve  specific  purposes,  and  always  successfully.  To  the 
education  of  an  artist  Rej lander  added  years  of  practice  as  a 
photographer,  not  simply  in  manufacturing  conventional  por- 
traits, but  in  producing  art  studies  and  complete  pictures.  His 


"Two  Ways  of  Life"  will  be  remembered  as  long  as  the  art 
exists.  In  his  practice  he  required  a  great  variety  of  effects  in 
lighting,  but  with  all  his  marvellous  skill  and  resource  he  found 
it  difficult  to  get  what  he  wanted  in  this  form  of  studio,  and  was 
glad  when  circumstances  compelled  him  to  abandon  it. 

In  designing  this  studio,  the  builder's  chief  aim  was  to  secure 
a  mode  of  lighting  similar  to  that  used  by  painters,  so  that  the 
studio  obtained  may  be  available  for  painters;  the  same  con- 
ditions of  light  and  shadow  existing  in  a  photograph  which  are 
required  in  painting.  That  the  same  light  would  be  often  valuable 
for  portraiture  and  general  photography,  there  was  no  reason  to 
doubt ;  the  only  misgiving  being  in  the  amount  of  light,  which 
was  found  to  be  insufficient  for  any  but  the  steadiest  of  sitters. 


VARIOUS   FORMS   OF   STUDIOS. 


It  had  also  the  inconvenience,  common  to  these  studios,  of  being 
so  strange  and  gloomy  in  effect  as  to  materially  interfere  with 
the  expression  of  the  sitter. 

It  was  built  of  corrugated  iron  ;  the  total  length  was  30  feet. 
The  portion  devoted  to  the  sitter  was  10  feet  long  and  11  feet 
wide;  the  remaining  20  feet  curving  in  near  the  door,  and 
becoming  narrower,  so  that,  at  the  extreme  end,  where  the  dark 
room  was,  the  width  was  7  feet  only.  The  light  was  obtained 
solely  from  the  white  spaces,  a,  b,  c,  d,  e,  /,  in  the  diagram,  the 
light  falling  from  the  north-west.  The  door,  a,  consisted  of  a 
plate  of  glass  7  feet  high  by  3  feet  wide.  The  window  adjoin- 
ing, b,  consisted  of  another  plate  of  glass,  7  feet  by  5  feet ;  this 
joined  another  plate,  c,  in  the  roof,  which  was  5  feet  wide  and 
3  deep.  These  three  were  of  white  plate-glass,  and  constituted 
the  chief  source  of  light.  On  the  opposite  side  there  was  no  glass 
at  all,  but  the  interior  was  painted  white  to  secure  reflected 
lights.  The  minor  lights,  <?,  e,  /,  were  generally  covered  with 
blinds,  their  object  being  to  secure,  not  direct,  but  diffused  light, 
to  soften  the  shadows. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  sitter  was  lighted  from  the  side  and 
side-top,  front  light  and  direct  vertical  light  being  avoided. 
The  camera  was  in  comparative  darkness,  enabling  the  operator 
to  focus  without  the  aid  of  a  cloth.  The  eye  of  the  sitter  also 
looked  into  darkness,  a  great  advantage  when  we  consider  the 
dazzling  effect  of  some  of  the  studios  of  the  time,  but  not  of 
so  much  consequence  now,  when  less  light  is  used  in  all 
studios. 

One  of  the  most  useful  variations  of  the  tunnel  studio  was  that 
of  Colonel  Stuart  Wortley.  In  this  studio  a  much  larger  amount 
of  light  was  admitted  than  with  Eejlander's.  On  reference  to 
the  subjoined  ground  plan,  it  may  be  seen  that  the  total  length 
of  the  room  was  36  feet ;  the  portion  really  constituting  the 
studio  was  12  feet  wide  by  13  feet  long.  The  unlighted  portion, 
in  which  the  camera  stood,  was  23  feet  long  by  8  feet  wide. 


10 


THE    STUDIO, 


The  extreme  end  was  divided  off  to  form  the  dark  room. 
part  marked  6  had  a  tier  of  shelves  for  various  purposes. 


The 


I 


On  reference  to  the  sketch  of  the  elevation,  it  will  he  seen 
that  the  studio  portion  was  12  feet  high  at  the  ridge.     One  side 


•"* 

/ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

i 

// 

H 

EB     EB  1 
i_  I    , 

DD 

~2 
o 

3 

-v- 

of  the  studio  was  all  glass,  consisting  of  corrugated  glass  from 
the  ground  to  7  feet  high,  and  from  thence  to  the  roof  clear 


This  was  a  distinctive  and  valuable  feature.  The  sloping 
front  light  (7)  was  clear  glass.  The  opposite  side  of  the  studio 
was  opaque,  a  reflected  light  only  being  obtained  on  that  side. 
The  roof  (4)  was  also  opaque.  The  only  portions  having  glass 
were  one  side  of  the  square  or  studio  portion,  and  the  front 
sloping  portion  of  the  roof  (7).  With  the  exception  of  the 
glazed  portions,  the  room  was  chiefly  constructed  of  inch  board- 
ing, roofed  with  asphalte  felt.  The  un-illuminated  portion  was 
7  feet  high.  The  window,  marked  2,  was  of  orange  glass  for 
the  dark  room.  Each  pane  of  glass  had  a  set  of  two  blinds,, 
one  white,  the  other  black,  worked  independent  of  each  other. 


VARIOUS   FORMS    OF   STUDIOS.  11 

There  were  many  objections  to  the  tunnel  form  of  studio,  the 
chief  of  which  were  as  follows  : — 

When  the  blinds  were  drawn  up,  the  light  was  a  full  front 
light,  the  worst  that  could  be  employed  for  portraiture.  To  get 
a  well- lighted  head,  considerable  knowledge  of  the  effect  of, 
and  much  trouble  in  the  use  of,  blinds  was  necessary,  and  when 
the  head  was  well  lighted  in  oneway — that  is,  when  the  modelling 
was  good — it  was  badly  lighted  in  another ;  there  was  not  enough 
light. 

The  variation  in  possible  effects  was  limited.  There  was  little 
opportunity  of  getting  any  other  than  the  ordinary  form  of  light- 
ing. So-called  Rembrandt  effects  were  not  common  when  the 
tunnel  was  in  vogue,  but  they  would  have  been  very  difficult  to 
produce. 

It  was  only  suitable  for  taking  single  portraits.  It  was  not 
adapted  to  groups  of  more  than  two  or  three  persons,  because  if 
a  group  of  figures  occupied  much  space,  one  side  would  be  well 
in  the  light,  the  other  too  much  in  shadow. 

The  general  effect  was  gloomy  in  the  extreme.  The  tunnel 
had  a  dreary,  dungeon-like  aspect,  depressing  to  the  sitter  as  well 
as  to  the  operator. 

As  this  is  not  a  history  of  studio  building,  it  is  scarcely  worth 
while  to  go  into  the  details  of  other  forms  which  have  been 
taken  by  the  glass-room.  The  question  for  practical  photo- 
graphers is,  What  is  the  best  form  of  studio  to  build  ?  I  hope 
to  do  something  towards  answering  this  important  question  in 
the  next  chapter. 


CHAPTER  II. 

THE    BEST    FORM    OF    STUDIO. 

IT  may  sound  not  a  little  dogmatic  to  assert  that  anything  is 
finally  the  best  in  this  ever-changing  and  inventive  world,  where 
the  finality  of  to-day  is  but  the  precursor  of  to-morrow's  pro- 
gress ;  but  after  many  years'  experience,  and  after  a  great  deal  of 
ingenuity  and  money  have  been  spent  in  the  endeavour  to  invent 
something  new,  practical  photographers  are  still  of  opinion  that 
for  portrait  studios  no  form  has  yet  been  invented  to  compare 
with  that  of  which  the  lean-to  and  ridge-roof  are  types.  It  is 
on  this  general  form  that  the  studio  I  am  about  to  describe  and 
recommend  is  based. 

That  the  best  beginning  to  get  at  what  we  want  is  to  discover 
what  we  require,  is  a  truism  none  can  dispute.  Let  us,  then, 
try  to  arrive  at  what  are  the  necessary  points  to  consider  in 
designing  a  well-appointed  studio. 

Experience  has  proved  that  the  principle  of  excluding  direct 
sunlight,  and  of  working  with  diffused  light,  is  the  best.  The 
interior  of  the  building,  therefore,  should  be  well  protected  from 
the  direct  rays  of  the  sun. 

The  arrangements  for  managing  the  light  should  be  simple, 
so  that  they  may  be  under  the  immediate  and  instant  control 
of  the  operator ;  all  complicated  systems  of  blinds  should  be 
avoided. 


THE  BEST  FORM   OF  STUDIO.  13 

Both  ends  of  the  studio  should  be  available  for  use,  so  that 
the  light  may  be  directed  on  the  sitter  from  the  right  or  from 
the  left. 

The  size  of  the  studio  should  be  large  enough  to  admit  of 
every  necessary  operation  without  inconvenience,  but  should  not 
be  so  large  as  to  become  unmanageable  or  difficult  to  manage. 

It  should  have  a  cheerful  and  homelike  appearance,  free  from 
that  look  of  an  over-crowded  work-room  to  which  the  studio- 
is  so  often  reduced. 

It  should  be  cool  in  summer,  and  comfortably  warm  in  the 
winter. 

Lastly. — The  developing  room  and  dressing  rooms  should  be 
within  convenient  reach,  the  former  commodious  with  sinks, 
tables,  shelves,  &c.  The  ventilation  and  light  should  be 
perfect. 

THE  DIMENSIONS. — The  first  thing  to  decide  in  designing 
a  studio  is  the  size.  This  will  often  be  ruled  by  the  space 
available;  but  we  will  assume  that  we  have  plenty  of  room. 
A  large  studio,  like  a  great  book,  is  a  great  evil.  It  is  well 
to  have  plenty  of  space  to  move  about  in,  and  to  contain  the 
necessary  furniture  and  accessories  ;  but  when  a  studio  is  above 
a  certain  size,  it  is  found  to  be  unwieldy  and  difficult  to  manage, 
and  the  lighting  not  so  good  as  that  found  in  smaller  studios. 
The  length  may  be  partly  determined  by  the  size  of  picture  to 
be  taken,  and  it  will  be  found  that  if  the  room  is  to  be  long 
enough  to  allow  of  a  cabinet  portrait  to  be  taken  of  a  full-length 
standing  figure,  with  sufficient  space  for  backgrounds,  and  a 
bit  over  for  contingencies,  28  feet  will  be  quite  sufficient.  In 
width,  enough  space  should  be  left  for  a  row  of  furniture  along 
one  side,  and  on  the  wall  side  for  shelves,  backgrounds,  head- 
rest, &c.  These  necessary  impedimenta  on  both  sides  will  be 
found  to  take  up  4  feet  6  inches,  and  if  the  width  is  made 
14  feet,  there  will  be  left  9  feet  6  inches  clear  space  for  working. 
This  could,  of  course,  be  increased,  by  removing  furniture,  to 


14  THE    STUDIO. 


the  full  width  of  the  room  when  necessary  for  taking  large 
groups.  This  size  is  sufficient  for  all  practical  purposes.  The 
photographer  who  goes  in  for  very  varied  effects  would  find 
more  space  for  background  and  accessories  convenient ;  but  it 
would  be  better  to  get  this  by  an  added  room,  rather  than  to 
interfere  with  the  working  part  of  the  studio. 

THE  ANGLE  OF  THE  SKYLIGHT. — A  great  deal  of  nonsense 
has  been  written  upon  the  effect  of  the  angle  of  glass  through 
which  the  light  is  admitted.  Some  have  held  that  if  the  pitch 
of  the  roof  is  high,  the  light  will  be  refracted  above  the  sitter's 
head ;  and  if  the  roof  be  flat,  the  light  will  be  directed  to  his 
feet.  This  has  been  learnedly  demonstrated  by  the  aid  of 
diagrams,  but  is,  nevertheless,  not  true.  The  amount  of  light 
will  practically  be  found  to  depend  on  the  size  of  the  opening 
through  which  it  is  admitted,  and,  to  some  extent,  to  the 
nearness  of  the  object  to  be  photographed  to  that  aperture,  and 
the  amount  of  sky  to  be  seen  from  the  sitter's  chair. 

The  pitch  of  the  glass  roof  of  the  ordinary  ridge-roof  studio 
usually  takes  an  angle  of  35°  to  45°.  When  the  roof  is  so  flat 
as  this  angle  indicates,  and  if  the  studio  is  not  protected  by  a 
high  building  on  its  south  side,  the  sun  will  be  found  to  shine 
in,  and  be  very  annoying  during  most  part  of  the  day,  and 
necessitate  the  employment  of  special  blinds  and  other  trouble- 
some contrivances.  A  very  little  alteration  of  the  pitch  of  the 
glass  roof  would  remedy  all  this.  As  is  well  known  by  every 
schoolboy,  the  sun  in  our  latitudes  never  attains  a  greater 
meridian  altitude  than  62°  30',  as  will  be  seen  in  the  diagram 
at  the  end  of  this  chapter  (page  21),  which  shows  the  highest 
and  lowest  altitudes  of  summer  and  winter.  If,  then,  the  slope 
of  the  roof  is  made  at  the  angle  of  the  highest  altitude  (62°  30'), 
or  still  more  upright,  there  would  be  no  more  trouble  from 
the  sun. 

The  kind  of  glass  for  glazing  the  skylight  has  been  the  subject 
of  much  controversy.  Ordinary  sheet  glass  is  the  best.  It  has 


THE   BEST   FORM   OF   STUDIO.  15 

the  merit  of  being  cheap,  and  has  the  further  advantage  of  not 
being  so  liable  to  change  to  a  yellow  colour  in  the  light  as  some 
other  makes  of  glass.  The  size  of  the  panes  should  be  as  large 
as  the  construction  will  admit.  In  the  chapter  on  Lighting  the 
Sitter,  I  mention  ground  glass  for  part  of  the  roof ;  this  should 
be  referred  to  in  connection  with  this  subject. 

The  other  dimensions  to  consider  will  be  the  height  of  the 
sides  and  the  ridge.  It  has  been  usual  to  make  the  side-light 
8  or  9  feet  high  to  the  eaves.  This  construction  rendered  it 
necessary  to  have  much  timber  at  the  junction  of  the  side  and 
roof,  a  place  where  important  light  should  be  admitted  without 
obstruction,  and  great  stress  used  to  be  laid  on  the  necessity  of 
having  low  side-lights,  so  that  the  feet  in  a  carte-de-visite  may 
be  properly  lighted !  We  are  wiser  now.  There  is  no  use  for 
the  admission  of  any  light  lower  than  4  feet  6  inches  or  5  feet. 
"We  thus  ascertain  the  height  of  the  front  wall  to  support  the 
skylight ;  and  if  we  determine  that  the  height  of  the  room  to 
the  ridge  shall  be  12  feet,  we  get  the  principal  dimension,  and 
the  section  of  the  room  takes  the  form  shown  in  the  sketch 
(see  page  21). 

If  the  studio  is  placed  against  a  building,  it  would  be  better 
to  make  the  unglazed  part  a  lead  flat,  which  may  be  made  useful 
for  some  purposes,  such  as  printing,  or  it  may  be  built  on ;  but 
if  the  studio  is  in  the  open,  then  the  roof  may  take  the  direction 
of  the  dotted  line  in  the  section,  but  the  wall  on  which  it  rests 
must  not  be  less  than  8  feet  high,  or  there  will  not  be  sufficient 
space  to  move  backgrounds.  The  unequal  sides  give  an  ugly 
effect  to  the  gable,  but  this,  in  most  cases,  can  be  broken  by 
other  buildings. 

The  light  should  have  a  northern  aspect.  If  it  incline  to 
the  north-east,  so  much  the  better.  In  the  long  days,  however 
upright  the  skylight  is  constructed,  the  sun  will  shine  into  the 
studio  in  the  early  moining  and  in  the  evening.  If  the  room 
is  turned  towards  the  north-east  the  sun  will  be  off  it  before 


16  THE   STUDIO. 


the  studio  is  required  for  use,  and  will  be  better  protected  from 
its  rays  in  the  afternoon. 

Both  ends  of  the  room  should  be  backgrounds. 

THE  BLINDS  should  run  easily,  and  the  means  of  altering 
them  be  readily  accessible.  Spring  rollers  are  good,  but  they 
sometimes  get  out  of  order.  I  have  found  it  a  good  plan  to 
make  the  blinds  draw  up  with  a  clockweight.  Blinds  are 
more  particularly  referred  to  in  the  chapter  on  Lighting  the 
Sitter. 

THE  APPEABANCE  OF  THE  ROOM. — A  great  deal  of  the  success 
of  the  portrait  will  depend  on  the  effect  of  the  photographer 
and  his  studio  on  the  sitter.  " Treatment"  by  the  photographer 
is  considered  further  on ;  it  will  be  only  necessary  here  to  say 
a  word  or  two  on  the  appearance  of  the  studio. 

I  prefer  that  the  studio  should  have  the  effect  of  a  moderately 
furnished  living  room,  such  as  sitters  may  be  expected  to  occupy 
in  their  own  homes ;  avoiding  shabbiness  on  the  one  hand,  and 
ostentatious  show  on  the  other.  Don't  let  there  be  a  great 
display  of  anything,  not  even  of  your  own  good  taste.  The 
effect  should  come  on  the  visitor  as  a  matter  of  course.  You 
will  not  be  able  to  hide  the  implements  of  your  art,  nor  is  it 
desirable  that  you  should  do  so.  What  I  very  much  object  to 
is  that  appearance  of  wreckage  and  lumber  so  often  seen  in 
studios.  Your  cameras,  backgrounds,  accessories  must  be  there, 
but  keep  them  in  order.  I  like  to  keep  the  centre  of  my  studio 
absolutely  free,  except  for  the  camera,  and  perhaps  a  table  or 
chair  at  the  background  end,  and  the  furniture  arranged  along 
the  walls  ready  for  use  when  called  upon.  A  cheerful  effect 
has  a  great  influence  on  many  people.  The  tunnel  was 
recommended  for  the  singular  reason  that  it  would  aid  the 
expression ;  but  it  did  just  the  reverse.  There  are  people  whose 
temperament  will  not  allow  them  to  look  happy,  however  much 
they  try,  if  they  have  to  stare  into  a  gloomy  space.  It  is  bad 
enough  to  be  taken  to  a  strange  place  and  be  made  to  go  through 


THE   BEST   FORM   OF   STUDIO.  17 

a  strange  operation,  without  the  additional  discomfort  of  being 
taken  into  an  uncomfortable  room. 

As  a  general  principle,  violent  contrasts  should  be  avoided  in 
the  furnishing  of  the  studio,  everything  being  kept  as  quiet  and 
harmonious  as  possible.  The  wall  paper  should  be  simple  and 
quiet  in  pattern,  and  of  a  warm  grey  in  tone.  The  carpet  is  a 
difficulty.  For  appearance  I  should  prefer  to  have  it  all  over 
the  room ;  but  it  offers  resistance  to  the  easy  moving  of  back- 
grounds and  furniture.  It  is  better,  therefore,  to  compromise  the 
matter,  and  cover  the  floor  with  linoleum  of  a  small,  simple  pattern, 
and  have  squares  of  carpet  at  both  ends  where  the  sitters  are 
usually  placed.  It  is  easy  now  to  obtain  carpets  of  suitable  pattern . 
Indian  and  Persian  rugs  are  very  useful.  There  should  be  a  fixed 
background  at  each  end ;  others  may  be  stretched  on  frames  set 
up  on  castors,  so  that  they  may  be  rapidly  changed  without  effort. 

THE  TEMPEBATUBE  AND  VENTILATION  should  be  carefully  at- 
tended to.  llany  people  are  deterred  from  having  their  por- 
traits taken  for  fear  of  the  ordeal  by  heat  in  a  photographer's 
stifling  studio.  It  is  pleasant  to  hear  visitors  say,  as  I  often 
do,  when  they  enter  your  studio  in  one  of  the  broiling  days  of 
summer,  "Why,  this  is  the  coolest  place  in  the  town!" 
Perfect  comfort  in  the  dog  days  can  only  be  had  when  the 
studio  has  a  high  building  on  the  south  side.  I  once  had  a 
studio  of  the  old  ridge-roof  form  in  which  I  suffered  much 
from  the  heat,  although  the  half  towards  the  south  was  built 
solid.  The  southern  side  of  the  roof  was  slated,  and  became 
very  hot.  I  cured  this  by  putting  up  a  wooden  blind  entirely 


covering  the  slates,  but  fixed  about  a  foot  from  them,  so  that  a 
current  of  air  should  flow  under  the  covering.  The  blind  was 
carried  higher  than  the  roof,  as  shown  in  the  sectional  diagram. 

c 


18  THE   STUDIO. 


It  was  found  that  the  lighting  was  quite  as  quick  and  good  as 
before,  and  this  suggested  placing  the  roof  of  any  future  studio 
at  so  upright  an  angle  that  the  sun  could  not  look  over  the 
ridge,  even  on  the  longest  day. 

THE  DBESSING  BOOM  should  be  conveniently  near  the  studio. 
I  have  known  this  room  to  be  on  one  floor  and  the  studio  on 
another.  This  is  very  awkward,  and  likely  to  create  confu- 
sion. A  second  room  would  be  found  useful. 

AN  ANTE-ROOM  between  the  reception  room  and  the  studio 
would  be  found  invaluable;  it  is  useful  to  both  ends.  It  is 
often  advantageous  to  show  some  special  picture  away  from  the 
crowd  of  the  general  exhibition  room,  and  it  is  especially  useful 
to  ask  the  friends  of  the  sitter  to  go  into  while  the  sitting  is 
taking  place. 

THE  DEVELOPING  ROOM. — No  room  is  more  neglected  than 
this  one.  Any  closet  is  thought  good  enough  for  a  dark  room ; 
but  no  part  of  the  establishment  should  call  for  more  thought 
and  attention.  Health,  comfort,  eyesight,  and,  to  a  great  ex- 
tent, the  quality  of  the  work  done,  depend  on  this  room. 
There  should  be  sufficient  space  to  conduct  all  the  operations 
in  comfort.  Table  space  should  be  ample,  and  there  should  be 
sufficient  shelves  to  hold  everything  but  dust.  The  sinks  used 
to,  be  made  of  wood,  lined  either  with  gutta-percha  or  pitch, 
and  were  always  causing  trouble ;  white  porcelain  sinks  were 
expensive,  and  could  never  be  got  large  enough  for  all  purposes. 
For  several  years  I  have  used  Doulton's  sinks ;  they  are  made 
of  glazed  stoneware,  are  very  cheap,  can  be  got  of  any  size,  and 
are  also  useful  for  other  purposes.  I  use  one  of  them  as  a  hypo 
dish,  and  a  series  of  them  for  washing  prints. 

Perfect  ventilation  should  be  provided  for.  The  dark  room 
is  not  so  stifling  and  unhealthy  now  as  it  was  when  collodion 
was  used,  but  deleterious  vapours  still  arise  from  the  ammonia 
and  other  chemicals.  This  chapter  is  concerned  more  with  de- 
sign than  construction,  but  the  following  sketch  for  a  ventilator 


THE   BEST   FORM   OF   STUDIO. 


19 


may  as  well  be  given  here.  It  admits  the  air,  but  excludes 
the  light.  The  arrangement  consists  of  a  long  box  of  any  length 
required,  with  an  opening  (AB)  all  along  the  lower  side  of  the 
front,  and  a  similar  one  (OP)  all  along  the  upper  side  at  the  back. 
On  the  inside_[of  the  hox  two  partitions  (DD)  are  made ;  one  ex- 
tending from  the  bottom  to  within  about  6  inches  from  the  top, 
and  the  other  extending  from  the  top  to  within  about  6  inches 
from  the  bottom.  The  height  of  the  box  is  about  1  foot  6 
inches,  and  the  depth  from  back  to  front  is  but  little  more. 


Dark  Room 


The  opening  in  front  (AB)  should  be  the  same  with  the  space 
left  above  and  below  the  two  partitions  (DD),  and  also  the  same 
as  the  opening  (OP) ;  the  spaces,  likewise,  between  the  parti- 
tions and  the  back  and  front  of  the  box,  and  between  the  two 
partitions  themselves,  should  be  of  the  same  size,  viz.,  6  inches. 
A  door  at  P  is  provided,  to  shut  up  to  such  a  degree  as  may  be 
necessary.  The  passage  of  the  air  through  this  apparatus  is 
shown  by  the  arrows  in  the  cut.  It  will  be  obvious,  from  a 
little  consideration,  that  no  light  can  enter  the  room  through 


20  THE  STUDIO. 


the  air-passage.  SS  is  intended  for  an  iron  or  zinc  shade,  fitted 
outside,  if  the  apparatus  be  much  exposed  to  the  weather.  It 
would  also  help  to  screen  the  light  from  the  outside  opening 
(AB).  This  ventilator,  with  a  grating  in  the  floor,  ought  to 
keep  the  air  of  the  room  pure. 

THE  LIGHT. — There  is  so  much  difference  of  opinion  as  to 
what  light  should  he  used  to  work  by,  that  I  feel  considerable 
diffidence  in  giving  any  advice  on  the  subject.  In  my  own 
practice  I  have  a  window  glazed  with  two  panes  of  orange 
glass,  to  which  is  added  a  sheet  of  white  ground  glass.  Over 
this  runs  on  rollers  a  shutter  of  ruby  glass.  When  I  am  chang- 
ing plates,  or  when  the  plate  is  naked,  I  use  the  shutter ;  but 
after  the  developer  has  begun  its  work  I  roll  back  the  ruby 
glass,  and  then  have  almost  as  good  a  light  as  when  collodion 
was  used. 

THE  STUDIO  OF  THE  FUTURE  will  probably  have  no  sloping 
roof.  It  is  better  to  abstain  from  giving  advice  not  based  on 
experience,  but  if  I  had  to  build  another  studio  it  would  take 
the  form  of  a  square  room  26  feet  to  30  feet  square,  14  feet 
high,  the  north  side  glazed  from  the  top  to  within  4  feet  6 
inches  of  the  ground.  This  is  the  simplest  possible  form,  and 
I  believe  there  would  be  plenty  of  light,  and  that  every  kind  of 
indoor  effect  could  be  got  in  this  room,  besides  which  several 
difficulties  would  be  avoided.  There  would  be  no  more  fear 
of  the  weather ;  hail  and  snow  may  do  their  worst  without 
doing  any  damage ;  and  the  blinds,  being  upright,  would  work 
with  ease.* 

To  conclude  this  part  of  my  subject,  I  give  a  plan  of  the 
studio  I  have  suggested  and  its  accompanying  rooms,  which 
can  be  easily  modified  to  suit  different  situations,  and  a  section 
of  the  studio,  showing  the  angle  of  the  glass  at  62°  30'. 

*  Since  the  first  edition  of  this  book  was  published  I  have  heard  of 
several  studios  built  on  this  principle,  and  found  to  be  most  successful. 


THE   BEST   FORM   OF   STUDIO. 


o 
o 
or 


«j 

II 

e 


|  ] 


idO1  3A3CI 


L I K a 


\/' 

I 

i 

1 

Jr 

O  N 


of 

' 


CHAPTER  III. 

BACKGROUNDS. 

DOUBTLESS,  the  backgrounds  used  by  photographers  have  very* 
much  improved  during  the  last  half-dozen  years,  but  there  is 
still  a  great  deal  that  wants  further  improvement.  For  years 
writers  in  the  English  Photographic  Journals  preached  their 
little  sermons  on  the  fearful  things  that  even  photographers  of 
taste  were  constrained  to  use,  and  tried  to  win  over  our  manu- 
facturers to  something  more  gentle  in  design,  and  light,  and 
shade ;  but  it  was  left  for  an  American  to  supply  the  demand, 
and  that  the  demand  for  something  better  was  great,  is  shown 
by  the  number  of  Seavey's  backgrounds  now  used — and  pirated. 
There  is  a  mournful  satisfaction  in  knowing  that  our  background 
makers  can  imitate  others,  if  they  cannot  give  us  anything 
original,  or  indeed  useable,  of  their  own. 

This  refers  to  pictorial  backgrounds  ;  but  before  I  go  further 
I  should  like  to  say  a  word  or  two  on  backgrounds  in  general. 

It  has  been  considered  by  many  great  artists  that  the  back- 
ground is  not  the  least  important  and  difficult  part  of  the  picture. 
The  proper  use  of  a  background  is  to  give  relief  to  the  figure, 
and  breadth  to  the  general  effect.  As  we  have  only  a  flat  sur- 
face on  which  we  can  suggest  the  roundness  and  solidity  of 
nature,  we  must  resort  to  artifice  in  the  arrangement  of  the 


BACKGROUNDS.  23 


light  and  shade,  to  enable  us  to  approach,  as  near  as  may  be,  to 
a  proper  expression  of  nature,  and  to  do  this  the  background 
gives  us  the  greatest  facilities. 

In  a  portrait,  the  head  should  be  the  first  attraction,  and 
everything  should  be  subordinate  to  this  part  of  the  picture. 
In  the  background  especially,  by  the  use  of  proper  lights  and 
shade,  and  gradations,  the  head  can  be  much  assisted.  In  some 
photographic  portraits  the  head  is  the  last  thing  the  spectator  is 
made  to  think  of.  The  picture  often  consists  of  a  mass  of  small 
details,  including  a  great  display  of  gaudy  furniture,  and  loud 
curtains  and  carpets,  with  the  figure  as  an  accessory,  and  the 
head  apparently  an  after-thought.  Occasionally,  the  confusion 
is  worse  confounded  by  the  addition  of  plants,  such  as  imitation 
palms  and  ferns,  and  other  dead  vegetables,  sprawling  over  the 
scene.  Some  of  these  things  are  all  very  well  in  their  way,  if 
properly  managed,  but  the  portrait  should  not  be  sacrificed  to 
them.  In  a  recent  exhibition  there  was  a  wonderful  portrait  of 
a  lady  in  evening  dress.  The  picture  was  large,  the  photography 
was  perfect,  the  chiaroscuro  brilliant  and  broad,  but  the  lady 
was  so  embedded  in  potted  plants  that  your  first  impression  was 
that  she  would  break  some  crockery  if  she  moved. 

It  should  be  taken  as  a  rule  that  if  you  want  to  give  dignity 
and  importance  to  the  figure,  you  cannot  do  it  by  smothering  it 
in  small  details.  Concentration  and  repose  cannot  live  in  the 
midst  of  loud  and  startling  effects. 

The  majority  of  the  best  portraits,  by  the  best  masters,  have 
no  background  which  strikes  the  eye,  the  figure  merely  being 
relieved  by  light  and  shade,  or  a  variety  of  broken  tints.  One 
of  the  finest  portraits  in  the  world — the  Gevartius  of  Vandyck 
in  the  National  Gallery — has  such  a  background,  and  so  have 
hundreds  more  of  the  best  portraits  the  world  possesses.  A 
background  of  one  uniform  tint,  unbroken  by  light  and  shade, 
or  effect  of  atmosphere,  has  an  unsatisfactory  effect,  making  the 
figure  appear  inlaid,  and  cutting  hard  against  the  background. 


24  THE   STUDIO. 


Such  an  effect  is  often  present,  and  is  decidedly  unpleasant,  in  the 
otherwise  nohle  portraits  by  Holbein. 

For  a  certain  class  of  photographic  portraits,  however,  the 
plain  background,  especially  if  it  be  skilfully  contrived  by 
variations  of  light  and  shade  to  relieve  the  figure,  will  always 
be  most  satisfactory.  In  such  cases  the  sole  object  of  the 
background  is  to  be  as  unobtrusive  as  possible  in  itself,  and  to 
contribute,  as  far  as  possible,  to  give  relief  and  force  to  the 
portrait. 

In  early  photographs  it  will  be  noticed  that  fche  background 
is  nearly  always  quite  plain,  without  any  attempt  at  gradation. 
This  was  probably  not  so  much  for  want  of  knowledge  in  the 
operator,  as  from  a  desire  to  show  his  skill.  In  those  days  of 
iodized  collodion,  it  was  not  an  easy  matter  to  produce  a  picture 
undisfigured  by  specks,  pinholes,  comets,  oyster-shell  markings, 
and  other  of  the  thousand  delights  common  to  the  wet  process, 
and  the  "  pride  of  the  workshop  "  had  to  be  shown  in  plain,  flat 
spaces,  unsullied  by  any  of  these  defects.  But  artistic  taste  in 
time  revolted  against  blank  walls — 

"  A  wall  so  blank,  my  shadow  I  thank 
For  sometimes  falling  there." 

Then  came  in  a  desire  for  gradation,  but  the  means  of  attaining 
it  were  not  found  to  be  easy;  no  background  painters  existed 
who  would  undertake  to  paint  a  graduated  background,  and  for 
want  of  them  many  contrivances  were  suggested  for  casting 
shadows.  One  of  the  best  of  these  was  a  simple  arrangement  of 
curtains  at  the  side,  from  which  the  light  came,  and  a  screen 
over  the  top  of  the  background,  so  arranged  to  move  up  and  down 
that  the  shadow  could  be  raised  or  lowered.  The  object  of 
most  of  these  contrivances  was  to  throw  a  shade  on  the 
background,  melting  into  a  mass  of  light,  which  could  be  so 
used  as  to  relieve  the  shadowed  side  of  the  head  with  light,  and 
the  lighted  side  with  dark.  This  arrangement  gives  great  force 


BACKGROUNDS. 


and  richness  to  the  work,  and  if  the  gradation  is  well  managed, 
the  head  is  thrown  into  strong  relief. 

Adam  Salomon,  the  famous  photographer  and  sculptor,  always 
laid  much  stress  on  the  gradation  of  the  background,  and  was  a 
prolific  inventor  of  contrivances  for  attaining  this  object,  the 
most  ingenious  of  which  was  the  alcove  background,  a  sketch  and 
description  of  which  may  be  interesting,  if  not  useful.  For 
amateurs  who  take  portraits  in  the  open  air,  the  combination  of 
a  method  of  controlling  the  lighting  in  connection  with  the  back- 
ground possesses  a  distinct  advantage. 

The  structure  consists  of  a  semi-circular  background,  with 


canopy  and  wings  capable  of  ready  arrangement,  so  as  to  control 
the  light  either  on  the  model  or  the  .background.  The  diagram 
will  help  to  make  the  further  description  clear.  The  curved 
background  is  about  8  feet  high  and  10  feet  wide  at  the 
diameter  of  the  circle.  Hinged  on  each  side  are  movable  wings, 
about  4  feet  wide,  and  a  canopy,  of  a  similar  character  and  width, 


26  THE   STUDIO. 


is  hinged  to  the  top  in  front.  Behind  this  projecting  front 
canopy  is  a  covering  to  the  curved  part  of  the  background ;  this 
consists  of  two  halves,  hinged  in  the  centre.  Attached  to  the 
background  is  an  upright,  terminating  in  a  series  of  loops  or 
pulleys.  Through  these  pass  cords  to  work  the  canopies.  The 
wings  and  canopy  are  light  frames  covered  with  thin  white 
muslin,  transmitting  some  light,  but  arresting  or  breaking  up 
direct  rays  of  sunlight.  The  background  is  on  castors,  so  as  to 
be  easily  movable,  and  is  papered  with  salmon-coloured  paper. 
Light  grey  would  answer  equally  well.  The  size  and  proportions 
might  be  altered  to  suit  circumstances. 

To  illustrate  its  working,  we  will  suppose  it  to  be  placed  in 
the  open  air,  but  it  would  do  equally  well  in  a  studio.  The 
sitter  is  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  circle,  of  which  the  curve 
forms  half.  "We  will  suppose  the  front  canopy  is  down,  and  the 
wings  just  so  much  closed  as  to  form  a  rectangular  opening  to 
the  alcove.  A  soft,  diffused  light  now  surrounds  the  figure.  A 
slight  elevation  of  the  canopy  at  once  admits  a  portion  of  direct 
light.  In  like  manner  the  proportion  of  side  light  is  modified 
in  any  degree  by  the  opening  and  shutting  of  the  wings.  The 
back  canopies  also  admit  light,  if  desired,  when  lifted.  It  will 
be  seen,  on  a  little  examination,  that  almost  any  amount  of  light, 
from  any  direction,  can  be  allowed  to  reach  the  sitter,  the  means 
of  controlling  its  direction  on  him  being  the  most  simple  and 
easily  managed  ;  and  it  will  be  found  in  practice  that  however 
the  sitter  is  lighted,  he  has  gradation  of  light  and  shade  behind 
him. 

It  is  fortunate  that  complicated  structures  of  this  kind  are  no 
longer  needed  in  the  studio.  Methods  of  painting  backgrounds 
are  so  much  improved  that  most  delicate  gradations  can  now  be 
produced  on  flat  surfaces.  The  illustration  is  taken  from  back- 
grounds I  have  now  in  use.  The  one  behind  is  a  light  back- 
ground gradated  towards  the  lower  part.  This  is  very  useful  for 
vignettes,  and  when  a  light  background  is  required.  The  other 


BACKGKOUNDS.  27 


is  a  gradated  background  to  be  used  with  the  light  coming  from 
the  dark  side.  This  produces  the  effect  already  mentioned  of 
the  shadowed  side  of  the  head  relieved  by  light,  and  the  lighted 
side  by  dark.  A  reverse  of  this  should  be  supplied  for  use  at  the 
opposite  end  of  the  room,  where  the  sitter  is  lighted  from  the 
other  side.  This  illustration  gives  me  an  opportunity  of  mention- 
ing a  stand  for  backgrounds  I  have  found  very  convenient.  The 
backgrounds  are  stretched  on  stout  frames  8  feet  high  by  6  feet 
6  inches  wide.  Two  of  them  are  placed  back  to  back,  and  stands 


running  on  good  castors  screwed  to  the  sides,  as  shown  in  the 
sketch.  These  backgrounds  can  be  rolled  to  any  part  of  the 
studio  with  the  greatest  ease,  and  thus  the  operator  is  enabled 
to  place  his  sitter  in  any  part  of  the  room.  Two  or  more  extra 
backgrounds  can  be  attached  to  the  same  stand  if  they  are  hinged 
to  the  background  already  fixed,  so  that  they  open  like  the  leaves 
of  a  book.  Care  should  be  taken  that  they  open  towards  the 
wall,  so  as  not  to  obstruct  the  light  when  the  inner  backgrounds 
are  being  used. 


28  THE    STUDIO. 


There  are  many  cases,  however,  in  which  a  plain  background 
unrelieved  by  design  or  accessory  will  give  a  meagre  and 
unsatisfactory  effect ;  in  most  full-length  pictures,  for  instance. 
To  meet  this  want,  pictorial  backgrounds  were  introduced,  both 
of  interior  and  out-door  scenes.  It  is  often  desirable,  also, 
especially  where  children  are  the  subjects,  and  when  out-door 
costume  is  worn  by  the  sitter,  to  make  up  the  picture  with  a 
pictorial  background  and  foreground  accessories. 

Everything  possible  in  the  way  of  bad  taste  has  been  perpe- 
trated in  what  were  humorously  called  pictorial  backgrounds. 
It  would  be  useless  to  point  out  minutely  the  kind  of  thing 
I  allude  to.  The  palatial  column  and  curtain,  so  suitable  for 
the  middle-class  citizen ;  the  raging  sea  and  profile  rocks,  with 
a  carpet  on  the  sands  to  save  the  feet  of  the  delicate  young  lady 
out  in  the  storm  in  an  evening  dress ;  the  pasteboard  terrace  and 
distant  mole-hills,  with  fountains  squirting  out  of  the  sitter's 
head — they  are  still  to  be  seen  in  the  albums  of  those  who  keep 
the  portraits  of  twenty  years  ago ;  they  have  not  all  faded.  But 
we  have  changed  all  that.  Background  painters  now  pay  some 
attention  to  possibility  and  pictorial  effect ;  but  they  also  find 
that,  if  they  are  to  obtain  the  greatest  pictorial  effect,  and  if 
justice  is  to  be  done  to  the  portrait,  that  the  background  must 
be,  to  some  extent,  conventional.  By  conventional,  I  mean  that 
it  must  not  have  the  full  force  of  nature,  but  must  take  a 
subordinate  position  ;  that  it  should  not  have  all  the  detail,  nor 
all  the  force  of  light  and  shade  of  nature  ;  that,  in  short,  while 
its  forms  are  based  on  those  of  nature,  it  should  be  such  a  mass 
of  light  and  shade  as  will  support  the  figure  without  distracting 
the  eye  from  the  head.  At  the  same  time,  there  should  be  no 
violent  disregard  of  nature ;  there  should  be  a  general  truth,  if 
not  a  particular  one.  If  the  trees  have  not  all  their  leaves, 
they  should  look  as  if  they  had  been  drawn  from  nature.  The 
distant  mountains  should  look  distant.  The  horizon — ah !  there 
is  the  difficulty.  Where  should  the  horizon  be  ? 


BACKGROUNDS.  29 


There  has  been,  perhaps,  more  discussion  on  the  position  of 
the  horizon  in  a  landscape  background  than  on  any  other  tech- 
nical detail  occurring  on  the  art  side  of  photography.  Shall  we 
keep  to  stern,  uncompromising  truth,  or,  for  the  sake  of  pictorial 
effect,  shall  we  depart  from  the  truth  of  nature  ?  Shall  we,  as 
a  literal  art  like  photography  suggests,  keep  to  absolute  fact,  or 
shall  we,  like  Eeynolds,  Gainsborough,  Titian,  and  many 
another  great  portrait  painter,  depart  from  fact  for  the  sake  of 
making  a  better  picture  ?  Shall  we,  in  short,  give  up  pictorial 
effect  for  the  sake  of  that  literal  truth  which  has  been  described 
as  so  praiseworthy — and  so  intolerable  ? 

The  horizon,  in  nature,  is  always  as  high  as  the  eye  of  the 
observer.  In  photography  the  lens  is  practically  the  eye  of  the 
observer.  If  the  lens  is  on  a  level  with  the  head  of  the  sitter, 
then  the  horizon  would  come  behind  the  head,  and  if  at  all 
defined  would  interfere  with  the  effect.  If  the  camera  were 
lower  than  the  head,  then  the  horizon  would  also  be  low. 
Many  of  the  great  painters  wilfully  ignored  this  law  of  nature, 
and  painted  their  backgrounds  all  clouds,  with  a  few  inches  of 
ground  seldom  reaching  above  the  knee.  This  seems  to  me  to 
be  a  matter  that  may  be  compromised  or  evaded.  If  the  camera 
is  placed  opposite  the  breast  of  a  standing  figure,  then  the 
horizon  may  be  below  the  shoulders,  and  leave  the  head  clear 
against  the  sky.  But  when  a  thing  is  doubtful,  it  is  better  to 
let  it  alone  altogether.  It  may  be  also  well  to  remember  that 
it  is  never  good  to  push  principle  to  excess,  and  there  may  be 
occasions  when  the  artist  would  be  justified  in  straining  the 
exact  truth,  especially  on  such  a  disputed  point  as  our  present 
one.  There  should  be  a  sufficient  choice  of  subjects  for  back- 
grounds without  any  horizon  whatever.  In  a  background  there 
should  be  no  false  lines.  The  sitter  and  distance  should  be  under 
the  same  conditions  of  perspective  as  well  as  light  and  shade. 

The  photographer  is  much  more  restricted,  both  in  resource 
and  aim,  than  the  painter  in  the  management  of  his  background. 


30  THE     STUDIO. 


Fuseli  says  :  "  By  the  choice  and  scenery  of  the  background  we 
are  frequently  enabled  to  judge  how  far  a  painter  entered  into 
his  subject,  whether  he  understood;]  its  nature,  to  what  class  it 
belonged,  what  impression  it  was  capable  of  making,  what  pas- 
sion it  was  calculated  to  arouse;  the  sedate,  the  solemn,  the 
severe,  the  awful,  the  terrible,  the  sublime,  the  placid,  the  soli- 
tary, the  pleasing,  the  gay,  are  stamped  by  it. '  Sometimes  it 
ought  to  be  negative,  entirely  subordinate,  receding  or  shrink- 
ing into  itself;  sometimes  more  positive :  it  acts,  invigorates, 
assists  the  subject.  A  subject  in  itself  bordering  on  the  common, 
may  become  sublime  or  pathetic  by  the  background  alone  ;  and 
a  sublime  or  pathetic  one  may  become  trivial  and  uninteresting 
by  it."  The  range  of  effect  here  indicated  far  transcends  any- 
thing possible  to  the  photographer.  Nevertheless,  he  may  at 
times  give  character  to  his  pictures  by  the  selection  of  character- 
istic backgrounds  and  accessories.  But  it  is  clear  that  the  use 
of  such  accessories  can  only  become  the  exception,  and  not  the 
rule,  as  by  far  the  greater  majority  of  portraits  do  not  admit  of 
any  such  aid  from  characterisation.  It  is  manifest,  moreover, 
that  the  photographer  cannot,  like  the  painter,  prepare  a  back- 
ground of  different  and  characteristic  design  for  each  picture. 
If,  then,  he  is  under  the  necessity  of  using  the  same  or  similar 
backgrounds  for  all  ranks  and  conditions  of  men — the  peer  and 
peasant  alike— they  must  of  necessity  be  sufficiently  devoid  of 
epecial  character  to  suit  any  without  incongruity. 


CHAPTEE  IV, 

ACCESSORIES. 

ACCESSOBIES  have  given  thoughtful  portraitists  more  trouble 
than  any  other  part  of  their  art  connected  with  picture-making. 
Many  have  taken  refuge  in  those  Protean  machines  which  are 
"everything  by  turns,  and  nothing  long,"  but  have  not  been 
able  to  hide  from  themselves  that  a  piece  of  furniture  that 
could  be  turned  into  a  score  of  absurd  incongruities  at  will 
was  a  sham,  and  therefore  unworthy  of  the  truthful  art.  As 
a  rule,  everything  that  is  made  purposely  for  studio  use  smacks 
of  the  studio,  and  proclaims  itself  as  a  make-up.  Of  course,  in 
saying  this,  I  do  not  object  to  making-up,  or  anything  that  will 
aid  in  producing  a  picture,  for  what  is  art,  after  all,  but  make- 
up ?  "What  I  do  object  to  is,  that  the  art  should  be  made  too 
palpable.  Any  furniture  that  is  made  for  the  studio,  and  is 
seen  nowhere  else,  is  objectionable.  A  chair,  for  instance,  that 
is  made  for  a  figure  to  lean  on,  and  looks  like  it ;  a  sham  piano, 
painted  a  dull  grey,  so  that  it  may  "take"  well;  sham  windows 
and  papier  mache  chimney  pieces  ;  the  posing  chair  that  is  half 
a  couch ;  the  elaborately  carved  table — all  these  are  bad.  Just 
such  furniture  as  is  found  in  the  houses  of  ordinary  reasonable 
beings  is  what  is  wanted,  and  as  much  variety  of  this  as  you 
like. 

It  was  once  the  fashion  to  fill  the  studio  with  old  carved  oak 


32  THE   STUDIO. 


furniture  from  AVardour  Street,  and  a  photographer  would  take 
a  good  deal  of  trouble  to  show  off  his  ornate  table  at  the  risk  of 
detracting  from  the  effect  of  the  head  of  the  portrait.  He 
had  the  excuse  for  using  this  stuff,  that  the  ordinary  furniture 
of  the  day  was  about  as  ugly  as  it  could  be  made.  There  is  no 
such  excuse  now.  The  art  of  design  has  made  giant  strides 
during  the  last  twenty  years,  and  in  no  department  is  this 
more  conspicuous  than  in  furniture. 

The  once  much-abused  curtain  may  be  used,  but  not  in  the 
old  way.  The  column  is  now  banished;  and  the  heavy  rep 
material  tied  up  in  ugly  folds,  with  a  very  pronounced  cord 
and  tassel  following  the  lines  of  the  figure  instead  of  contrasting 
it,  can  no  longer  be  allowed.  There  is  now  a  great  variety  of 
beautiful  materials  within  easy  reach  of  the  photographer,  one 
of  the  best  of  which  is  Madras  muslin.  This  is  a  thin  fabric 
that  easily  falls  into  graceful  folds,  and  the  designs  are  in  the 
very  best  taste.  One  of  these  curtains,  tastefully  arranged  on 
a  screen,  gives  light  to  a  background  that  was  in  danger  of 
being  too  plain  and  dull,  while  the  lines  can  be  adapted  so  a& 
to  agree  with  the  composition  of  the  figure.  I  have  mentioned 
a  screen.  A  screen  is  of  great  service  in  a  studio.  A  three  or 
four-leaf  folding  Japanese  screen  is  perhaps  the  best.  It  can 
be  put  to  a  variety  of  uses  in  making  up  backgrounds,  and  is 
useful  for  other  purposes. 

There  is  great  virtue  in  variety.  If  the  photographer  would 
make  up  his  mind  never  to  take  two  pictures  alike,  he  would 
strengthen  his  inventive  powers,  make  his  show  frames  more 
attractive,  and  life  more  interesting  to  him.  The  monotony  of 
making  all  men  and  women  lean  on  the  same  chair,  in  the  same 
position,  and  photographing  them  one  after  another,  from  week's 
end  to  week's  end,  must  be  dreadful.  The  continual  use  even 
of  a  good  thing  is  objectionable.  "Who  is  not  weary  of  the 
eternal  rustic  stile,  evidently  quite  new  from  the  workshop, 
and,  like  the  Irish  gate,  without  any  hedge  or  fence  on  either 


ACCESSORIES.  33 


side,  so  that  you  must  make  believe  almost  as  much  as  Dick 
Swiveller's  Marchioness,  if  you  want  to  persuade  yourself  there 
is  no  other  way  to  the  village  than  over  the  bars  ?  Now  a  stile 
in  itself  is  a  very  picturesque  thing,  so  also  may  be  a  wicket 
gate,  but  the  way  they  are,  as  a  rule,  made  and  used,  seems  to 
proclaim  with  a  grin  that  there  is  no  deception.  Even  if  the 
stile  was  perfect  in  its  way,  it  would  become  very  tiresome  from 
constant  use.  The  same  remarks  apply  to  the  ship's  mast  and 
the  swing,  both  good  of  their  kind,  when  used  occasionally  and 
in  season,  but  not  when  they  are  pressed  into  service  for  all 
purposes  against  nature  and  art. 

In  deprecating  palpably  made-up  articles,  I  am  far  from 
objecting  to  properly  made  aids  to  posing,  such  as  balconies  and 
balustrades  ;  occasionally  such  things  add  much,  for  instance,  to 
the  portrait  of  a  lady  in  walking  dress,  or  to  a  group  of  children 
in  outdoor  costume ;  but  to  be  unobjectionable,  they  should  be 
kept  subdued,  and  used  sparingly.  These  accessories  are  usually 
sent  out  from  the  manufactory  painted  one  uniform  drab  colour. 
It  would  be  easy  to  paint  them  to  look  old  and  weather-stained. 

For  seaside  studios  a  real  boat — or  half  a  one,  if  you  must 
economise  space — is  a  valuable  accessory,  and  is  much  better 
than  the  sham,  profile  article  which  is  often  used,  and  always 
speaks  for  itself.  I  have  seen  the  bows  of  a  real  old  boat  used 
with  great  effect,  and  it  was  found  to  be  very  suggestive  of 
poses.  A  bit  of  old  rope,  some  netting,  pebbles,  crab  baskets, 
and  other  objects  of  the  seaside,  also  aided  in  the  realistic 
effect. 

Besides  the  ordinary  furniture,  there  are  a  number  of  other 
things  that  are  necessary  for  the  use  of  the  portraitist.  Among 
others  I  find  a  small  platform,  standing  about  16  inches  from 
the  ground,  and  measuring  about  4  feet  square,  very  useful  in 
posing  children.  There  is  always  a  difficulty  in  getting  down 
to  them  when  they  are  placed  on  the  floor.  Specially  short 
head- rests  have  to  be  used,  and  the  camera  lowered  to  an  incon- 


34  THE   STUDIO. 


venient  extent.  If  the  platform  is  made  to  fold  in  the  middle, 
with  a  leg  to  pull  out  to  support  the  leaf,  as  is  seen  in  some 
tables,  it  takes  very  little  room.  With  some  well-made  rocks  of 
different  sizes,  and  bits  of  hay  on  this  platform,  very  natural 
portraits  of  children  can  easily  be  arranged.  Among  the 
smaller  articles  that  should  be  at  hand,  there  should  be  a  good 
supply  of  baskets  of  various  shapes,  and  vases  with  flowers, 
natural  by  preference,  but  well-made  artificial  ones  if  the  real 
ones  cannot  be  got.  Two  or  three  fans  will  be  found  useful, 
and  above  all  there  should  be  a  grand  collection  of  toys  for  the 
children,  from  the  squeaking  india-rubber  baby  up  to  the  boyish 
hoop  and  the  more  manly  cricket  bat,  not  forgetting  the  tennis 
racquet.  The  most  beautiful  thing  about  the  most  beautiful 
child  is  nearly  always  the  expression,  and  the  photographer  can 
only  hope  to  make  the  best  of  the  little  sitter  by  descending 
down  to  the  level  of  the  child.  A  photographer  who  cannot 
play  with  toys,  and  enjoy  the  game,  too,  while  he  is  about  it, 
ought  not  to  try  to  take  children.  Toys  specially  made  to 
attract  the  attention  of  children  should  be  at  hand.  A  loud 
ticking  watch  is  always  useful,  so  also  is  a  musical  box;  and  a 
good  deal  can  be  done  with  the  india-rubber  toys  which  give,  on 
squeezing,  that  plaintive  expression  to  their  feelings  so  dear  to 
childhood. 

REFLECTING  SCBEENS. — As  a  rule,  for  ordinary  portraiture,  no 
reflected  light,  other  than  the  natural  reflection  from  the  grey 
paper  wall,  will  be  necessary,  but  there  are  occasions  when  a 
reflector  may  be  useful.  It  sometimes  happens,  in  taking  shadow 
pictures,  that  it  is  difficult  to  introduce  a  weakened  light  to 
relieve  the  shaded  side,  and  secure  the  discrimination  of  forms 
and  textures.  All  broad,  strong  masses  of  shadow  should  be 
broken  up,  or  rather  light  should  be  let  into  them;  for  this 
purpose  nothing  is  better  than  a  screen  4  or  5  feet  square, 
papered  white  and  mounted  on  a  stand ;  or  one  of  the  leaves  of 
an  ordinary  folding  screen  may  be  papered  for  the  purpose. 


ACCESSORIES.  35 


Many  elaborate  contrivances  have  been  invented  or  suggested 
for  casting  reflections,  but  they  take  up  more  space  and  give 
more  trouble  than  they  are  worth.  One  of  the  simplest  and 
most  effective  reflectors,  other  than  a  plain  screen,  was  suggested 
by  Adam  Salomon.  In  describing  his  reflector,  he  says : — 
"  The  reflected  lights  ought  to  be  as  much  under  the  operator's 
control  as  the  direct  light,  and  a  strong  reflected  light,  per- 
fectly under  control,  may  often  possess  all  the  value  of  direct 
light.  In  the  little  contrivance  shown  in  the  diagram  I  have 


the  most  perfect  control  over  the  reflected  lights,  which  may  be 
thrown  in  any  direction,  up  or  down,  or  nearly  all  round  the 
figure.  It  consists  of  a  simple,  upright  framework  of  wood, 
about  6  feet  high  and  3  feet  wide,  with  a  couple  of  reflectors 
3  feet  square,  each  swinging  on  its  axis  in  the  framework,  and 
moved  by  the  handles  into  any  position.  One  side  of  each  re- 
flector is  painted  white,  and  the  other  side  is  covered  with 
polished  tin,  the  latter  to  give  the  strongest  reflection  when  re- 
quired. The  frame  can  be  placed  in  almost  any  position  towards 
the  shadowed  side  of  the  model,  and  the  two  reflectors  can  be 


36  THE   STUDIO. 


made  to  throw  light  on  any  portion  of  the  shadowed  side.  The 
use  and  the  value  of  the  contrivance  will  be  apparent  without 
many  words.  It  may  or  may  not  be  new,  but  I  have  not  seen 
one  before,  and  it  is,  at  any  rate,  sufficiently  valuable,  although 
trifling,  to  induce  me  to  offer  it  to  my  English  friends." 

Finally,  every  accessory,  from  the  steps  of  Haddon  Hall  to 
the  rattle  and  the  ball,  should  have  its  own  place,  so  that  it  can 
be  used  at  once  without  any  trouble  or  loss  of  time.* 

*  Lest  it  be  said  that  I  have  omitted  to  mention  the  principal  object  in 
the  studio — the  camera — I  may  as  well  say  here  that  the  optical  and 
chemical  side  of  photography  does  not  enter  into  my  plan.  That  part  of 
the  subject  is  exhaustively  treated  by  Capt.  Abney  in  his  "Handy  Books." 


CHAPTER   V. 

LIGHTING    THE    SITTER. 

As  the  succeeding  chapters  on  Posing  will  have  little  or  nothing 
to  do  with  light  and  shade,  a  few  words  on  the  mechanical 
means  of  producing  and  regulating  light  and  shade  on  the  sitter 
by  the  use  of  blinds,  screens  and  reflectors,  may  not  be  out  of 
place  as  an  introduction. 

The  first  aim  of  the  student  in  lighting  a  head — leaving  out 
of  the  question,  for  the  moment,  what  may  be  called  "  fancy  " 
lighting,  such  as  Rembrandts — should  be  to  get  roundness  and 
relief,  to  obtain  gradation,  and  to  avoid  patches  of  black  and 
white ;  to  so  light  the  head  that  beauties  are  made  prominent 
and  defects  hidden.  Or,  as  Mr.  Mayall  once  summed  up  the 
objects  of  lighting :  "  To  render  age  less  garrulous ;  make  beauty 
more  lovely;  to  impart  an  expression  of  intelligence  where 
nature  has  not  been  over  bountiful;  to  light  up  the  intellect, 
and  to  impart  the  quality  of  power  in  those  heads  on  which  she 
has  lavished  her  most  precious  gifts ;  in  short,  to  present  human 
nature  in  its  best  form,  by  aid  of  a  camera  and  a  properly-lighted 
room."  The  general  chiaroscuro  of  a  picture  will  not  be  dis- 
cussed here,  as  I  have  gone  fully  into  the  subject  in  a  former 
work.* 

*  "  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography."    Published  by  Piper  and  Carter. 


38 


THE   STUDIO. 


I  will  suppose  that  the  student  is  working  in  a  studio  such  as 
that  described  in  Chapter  II.  When  he  has  learnt  what  to  get 
and  how  to  get  it  in  this  form  of  studio,  he  will  be  able  to  apply 
his  knowledge  in  other  studios. 

In  his  first  serious  studies 'in  lighting,  I  should  recommend 
the  student  to  use  a  life-sized  plaster  cast.  It  has  been  objected 
that  this  will  not  yield  the  same  results  as  studying  effects  on 
the  human  subject,  because  one  is  simple,  the  other  complex. 
This  is  just  the  reason  why  I  recommend  the  plaster  bust  to  the 
young  student;  he  should  commence  his  studies  under  simple 
conditions,  avoiding  the  complex  until  he  has  quite  mastered 
the  more  simple  ones.  Whilst  studying  the  effects  of  light  on  a 
white  or  grey  bust,  there  is  no  fear  of  tiring  the  model,  there- 
fore no  cause  for  hurry ;  no  disturbing  influence  of  colour ;  he 
sees  exactly  the  effect  of  light  in  producing  high  lights,  reflected 
lights,  and  shadows  in  his  picture.  Having  once  learned  to 
produce  and  recognise  on  the  bust  satisfactory  and  pictorial 
effects  of  light  and  shade,  he  will  soon  learn  to  apply  what  he 
has  learned  to  the  lighting  of  the  living  model. 

To  make  my  remarks  as  clear  as  possible,  I  give  a  diagram  of 
the  glazed  part  of  the  roof  of  the  studio,  showing  the  blinds. 


1 

2 

3 

* 

6 

• 

6 

In  most  studios  of  this  form  the  spaces  occupied  by  blinds  1  and 
6  are  usually  solidly-constructed  roofs,  but  I  prefer  to  let  the 
glass  run  from  end  to  end,  as  it  is  of  use  to  the  photographer  in 
getting  pictures  lighted  from  the  back.  Besides,  too  much  glass 
can  easily  be  modified  by  blinds ;  too  little  does  not  admit  of 
such  a  remedy.  The  six  blinds  in  a  studio  28  feet  long,  would 
each  be  4  feet  8  inches  wide ;  if  the  studio  be  of  a  shorter  length, 
I  should  prefer  to  reduce  the  width  of  blinds  2,  3,  4,  and  5, 


LIGHTING   THE    SITTER.  39 

and  keep  1  and  6  of  the  full  width  of  from  4  feet  8  inches  to 
5  feet. 

Blinds  1  and  6  should  be  of  some  black  material,  and  the 
others  of  white,  or  the  grey  striped  material  called  "  Union." 
The  whole  of  them  should  run  on  rollers  at  the  top,  pulled  up 
easily  by  weights  or  springs.  The  blinds  should  always  be  in 
good  order,  and  ready  to  obey  the  least  touch  of  the  operator. 
There  should  be  another  black  blind,  pulling  up  from  the  eaves 
and  doubling  blinds  3  and  4.  The  use  of  this  blind  will  be  seen 
further  on. 

The  subject  of  lighting  the  sitter  has  been  often  treated,  and 
treated  as  it  only  can  be,  in  general  terms.  The  special  lighting 
of  each  sitter  is,  after  all,  a  question  which  can  only  be  solved 
by  the  operator  when  he  has  that  sitter  before  him.  He  must 
see  that  the  light  and  shade  fall  so  as  to  produce  the  most 
agreeable  effect  before  he  exposes  his  plate,  and  with  the 
capacity  of  seeing  this,  the  power  of  modifying  it  is  usually 
accompanied.  I  can  only  tell  him  what  to  look  for  generally, 
and  the  influence  of  the  blinds  in  producing  the  desired  effect. 

As  a  general  principle,  a  high  side-light,  a  little  in  advance 
of  the  sitter,  is  the  most  important  direct  light ;  excess  of 
vertical  light  is,  in  most  cases,  to  be  avoided ;  nevertheless,  it 
may  be  useful  at  times  in  giving  force  and  brilliancy  to  flat, 
commonplace  faces,  which  in  themselves  possess  very  little  relief . 
For  example,  I  think  I  should  use  a  good  deal  of  vertical  light 
in  taking  the  portrait  of  a  Chinaman.  On  the  other  hand,  where 
the  sitter  has  heavy  brows,  sunken  eyes,  or  prominent  features, 
the  least  possible  vertical  light  should  be  employed,  or  these 
features  will  look  more  marked  and  heavy.  With  such  faces 
the  side-light,  well  in  advance  of  the  sitter,  will  give  the  most 
soft  and  harmonious  effect  without  risk  of  flatness.  The  top  front 
light  will  generally  serve  to  illumine  sufficiently  the  shadowed 
side  of  the  face  without  the  use  of  reflecting  screens  other  than 
the  natural  reflection  from  the  grey  paper  of  the  wall. 


40  THE   STUDIO. 


Reflecting  screens  will,  however,  under  certain  circumstances, 
be  found  useful.  As  a  rule,  a  mild,  soft  light  is  what  is  required. 
Strong  illumination  produces  lights  and  shadows  of  great 
intensity,  giving  hlack  and  white  pictures ;  and  the  glare  of 
brilliant  light  interferes  with  the  expression  of  the  sitter. 

There  are  other  influences  besides  the  amount  of  space  through 
which  light  is  admitted.  The  aspect  of  the  day,  the  period  of 
the  year,  the  quality  of  the  light,  the  situation  of  the  studio, 
whether  in  town  or  country,  at  the  top  of  the  house  or  on  the 
ground ;  even  the  quality  of  the  plate,  for  a  very  sensitive  plate 
seems  to  require  a  greater  contrast  of  light  and  shade  than  a 
slow  one. 

All  these  things  prevent  anything  like  the  establishment  of 
fixed  rules  for  lighting.  There  is  no  patent  way  to  "fix  your 
light." 

The  true  test  of  good  lighting  is  roundness.  This  can  only 
be  got  by  securing  delicacy  in  the  half-tones ;  there  should  be 
no  broad  patches  of  black  and  white,  but  gradation  everywhere. 
The  operator  must  educate  himself  to  see  these  half  tones,  and 
he  must  see  them  in  the  model,  without  the  trouble  and  delay 
of  looking  at  the  ground  glass,  or  taking  and  printing  a 
negative.  Get  the  right  effect  in  nature,  and  the  rest  will 
follow — 

"  As  the  sitter's  lighted,  so's  the  picture  drawn." 

Having  stated  briefly  what  is  required,  let  us  walk  into  the 
studio,  and  try  to  reduce  our  theories  to  practice. 

We  will  begin  by  placing  the  bust  on  a  table  at  the  east  end, 
about  3  feet  from  the  background,  and  place  ourselves  in  the 
middle  of  the  room  where  the  camera  would  stand.  The  blinds 
are  all  drawn'down,  and  for  the  purposes  of  the  lesson,  we  will 
suppose  the  south  wall  to  be  too  dark  to  act  as  a  reflector. 

The  effect  ought  now  to  be,  not  darkness,  but  a  dull  light  of 
no  photographic  use.  The  model  looks  moderately  round,  but 
without  high-lights  or  details  in  the  shadows. 


LIGHTING   THE   SITTER.  41 

Pull  up  No.  2  blind  all  the  way.  You  will  find  that  the 
light  is  too  vertical,  and  that  the  shadows  under  the  eyebrows 
are  dark  and  heavy.  Pull  down  the  blind  half-way.  The  black 
vertical  shadows  are  softened.  The  high-lights  on  the  forehead 
and  nose  appear.  There  is  enough  light,  although  the  space 
opened  is  under  6  feet  by  5  feet,  to  get  a  negative  with  a 
moderate  exposure,  but  the  shadowed  side  of  the  face  is  too  dark 
and  without  transparency.  Place  a  grey  reflecting  screen  on  the 
shadowed  side,  and  the  shadows  will  look  softer,  and  the 
reflected  light  will  show  detail.  The  dark  side,  however,  ia 
still  too  dark  for  a  delicately  lighted  head.  There  are  several 
ways  of  altering  this.  One  would  be  to  replace  the  grey  screen 
with  a  white  one,  but  there  is  danger  in  this  of  throwing  a  light 
into  the  eye,  giving  a  strange,  blind  effect.  The  best  way  of 
lighting  the  dark  side  is  to  pull  up  No.  3  to  the  top,  and  if  this 
is  not  sufficient,  to  raise  No.  6.  If  this  again  is  not  sufficient — 
and  it  is  not  in  some  phases  of  the  light,  such  as  when  a 
luminous  white  cloud  is  passing — then  it  would  be  advisable  to 


work  diagonally,  as  shown  in  the  diagram,    a  is  the  background, 
b  the  sitter,  c  the  camera. 

Thus  far,  by  way  of  lesson ;  but  if  the  operator  wants  to  have 
his  room  so  arranged  that  he  need  seldom  think  of  his  lighting 
or  his  blinds,  except  for  fancy  lighting,  let  him  arrange  his 
skylight  as  follows : — 


42  THE   STUDIO. 


Blinds  No.  1  and  6  black. 

No.  2  and  5  half  up. 

No.  3  and  4  ground  glass  or  tissue  paper;  the  blinds  up. 

The  wall  to  be  papered  with  a  light  grey  diaper. 

It  will  be  found  that,  with  this  arrangement,  a  head  placed 
3  or  4  feet  from  either  background  will  be  full  of  subtle 
gradations,  with  sparkling  high-lights  and  sharp  touches  of  dark. 
It  would  be  well  also  to  note,  with  this  lighting,  the  different 
effects  on  the  head  as  it  advances  more  towards  the  centre  of 
the  studio.  Very  soft  effects  are  to  be  got  by  placing  the  sitter 
about  6  feet  from  the  end  backgrounds.  The  photographer 
should  study  the  light  in  every  part  of  his  room. 

I  have  said  nothing  of  the  difference  of  effect  on  a  full  face 
and  a  profile.  It  will  be  found  that  a  flatter  light  than  that 
used  for  a  full  or  three-quarter  will  be  better  for  a  side  face. 

FANCY  LIGHTING. — Yery  picturesque  effects  are  to  be  got  by 
the  various  modes  of  lighting  the  sitter  which  have  gradually 
come  under  the  designation  of  what  is  now  called  Fancy 
Lighting.  Of  these  the  Rembrandt  effect  obtains  the  most 
favour.  The  Rembrandt  portrait  is  usually  a  head,  more  or 
less  in  profile,  lighted  from  behind  and  the  side,  and  as  unlike 
anything  Rembrandt  ever  painted  as  possible.  I  have  always 
objected  to  this  title  for  these  shadow  pictures,  but  the  name 
sticks,  and  I  accept  it. 

To  light  a  Rembrandt,  place  the  sitter  under  the  junction  of 
blinds  2  and  3,  but  rather  more  under  3.  Pull  up  No.  2  half-way. 
Pull  down  3  and  4,  and  if  this  does  not  make  the  shadowed 
side  dark  enough,  there  should  be  another  black  blind  working 
under  and  supplementing  3  and  4,  rolling  up  at  the  bottom 
and  working  upwards,  but  not  quite  to  the  top.  Turn  the  head 
of  the  sitter  in  profile  towards  the  light.  With  this  arrange- 
ment it  will  be  found  that  there  is  a  bright  light  down  the  edge 
of  the  nose,  and  on  part  of  the  cheek.  The  shadowed  side  is 
probably  too  black;  anyway,  it  may  be  taken  as  a  rule  that 


LIGHTING   THE    SITTER.  43 

shadow,  however  dark  it  may  be  wanted,  is  always  better  for 
some  reflected  light  to  make  out  the  forms,  and  give  trans- 
parency. This  can  be  done  by  the  use  of  a  reflecting  screen, 
or  blind  No.  4  may  be  drawn  up  to  the  top,  letting  a  little  light 
on  the  dark  side,  over  the  edge  of  the  black  blind,  which,  it 
will  be  remembered,  does  not  reach  to  the  top.  The  shadow 
can  also  be  modified  by  gradually  withdrawing  the  black  blind, 
and  allowing  weak  light  to  get  through  the  white  or  grey 
blinds,  Nos.  3  and  4. 

A  good  effect  is  also  to  be  got  by  turning  the  sitter's  face 
quite  away  from  the  light,  looking  to  the  wall ;  in  this  case  the 
profile  is  entirely  in  shadow,  and  should  have  a  light  back- 
ground. I  have  entered  further  into  this  subject  in  the  next 
chapter. 

The  operator  should  occupy  his  leisure  time  in  trying 
experiments  in  lighting,  and  in  trying  to  get  away  from  the 
hum-drum  effects  he  is  compelled  to  produce  in  the  ordinary 
round  of  daily  portraiture,  recollecting,  however,  that  the 
illumination  should  be  adapted  to  the  sex,  age,  and  phy- 
siognomical peculiarities  of  the  sitter — to  bring  out  beauties, 
and  to  hide  defects. 


CHAPTEE  VI, 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER. 
THE  HEAD. 

IN  the  following  chapters  I  hope  to  give  some  general  ideas  on 
posing  sitters  for  portraiture,  suitable  for  the  requirements  of 
the  professional  photographer — not,  I  trust,  without  being  of 
some  use  to  the  amateur.  I  do  not  intend  to  confine  myself  to 
the  ornamental  and  elaborate,  but  shall  prefer  to  give  such 
simple  advice  as,  in  my  opinion,  is  calculated  to  be  of  most  use 
in  ordinary  studio  practice.  Much  of  it,  perhaps,  will  seem  too 
elementary  for  the  skilled  photographer,  but  I  trust  that  here 
and  there  may  crop  up  ideas  worthy  of  the  attention  of  even  the 
most  experienced  operator.  In  doing  this,  I  protest  against  the 
enervating  practice  of  giving  a  set  of  poses  for  the  imitation  of 
those  idle  and  thoughtless  operators  who  do  not  try  to  think  for 
themselves  and  adapt  their  ideas  to  their  subjects,  but  who  place 
their  sitters,  no  matter  how  unsuitable  it  may  be  to  them,  in  the 
same  position  day  after  day,  as  if  the  posing  chair  was  a  sort  of 
Procrustean  bed  on  which  everybody  must  be  cut  to  the  same 
size  and  shape  and  form,  and  brought  to  that  state  of  imbecile 
appearance  to  which  photography  is  popularly  supposed  to  reduce 
its  victims.  A  recent  writer  on  composition  has  some  forcible 
remarks  on  this  point.  He  says  :  "  Our  subjects  and  our  treat- 
ment of  them  must  be  emphatically  our  own ;  but  nevertheless, 


MANAGEMENT   OF   THE    SITTER.  45 

every  student  of  art  owes  it  to  himself  to  get  what  help  he  can 
from  the  study  of  the  works  of  the  great  painters  who  have 
gone  before.  His  object  should  be  to  notice  not  only  how 
natural  appearances  have  been  modified — or,  as  it  is  technically 
called,  treated — by  painters  of  acknowledged  fame,  but  also- 
why  this  was  done.  No  painter  who  has  in  him  any  spark 
of  originality  will  directly  repeat  any  effect  that  has  already 
been  painted ;  but  an  earnest  student  can  only  benefit  himself 
by  trying  in  a  measure  to  look  at  nature  from  the  point  of  view 
of  the  masters  of  his  art." 

For  the  purpose  of  these  lessons,  portraiture  may  be  divided 
into  different  classes,  such  as  the  head,  the  three-quarter,  the- 
full-length,  the  seated,  the  standing,  the  group,  &c.  Of  all  thi& 
variety  the  head  is,  perhaps,  the  most  important,  for  nine- 
tenths  of  the  portraits  taken  in  ordinary  studios — excluding 
thelower  class  and  "the  beach" — consist  of  heads  taken  under 
different  names,  as  the  Vignette,  the  Berlin,  the  Medallion,  the 
Rembrandt.  Now  it  might  be  thought  that  nothing  could  be 
simpler  or  easier  than  to  pose  a  head,  and  that  there  was  very 
little  to  say  on  the  subject;  but  if  we  are  to  judge  by  the 
majority  of  specimens,  we  see  that  the  art  of  setting  a  head 
properly  on  its  shoulders  is  not  given  to  all  men,  and  the  results 
suggest  the  notion  that  their  victims  were  first  hanged—  BUS.  per 
col. — and  then,  instead  of  being  "  drawn,"  according  to  the  old 
sentence,  had  been  photographed.  This  broken-necked  effect  i& 
more  visible  in  Bembrandts  than  in  the  other  forms  mentioned, 
although  they  are  not  absent  from  Vignettes  and  Medallions. 
The  reason  why  it  is  more  apparent  in  Eembrandts,  probably, 
is,  that  this  kind  of  picture  is  commonly  taken  in  profile,  and 
the  strain  to  turn  the  head  sufficiently  makes  it  lean  towards 
the  camera.  On  the  next  page  is  an  illustration .  You  have 
only  to  add  a  rope  to  make  the  thing  complete. 

The  eye,  also,  in  these  shadow  portraits,  nearly  always  seems 
to  be  afraid  of  looking  straight — the  shy,  half-frightened,  and 


46 


THE    STUDIO. 


wholly-deceitful  glance  of  the  eye  in  most  of  these  pictures, 
suggesting  that  none  but  the  very  worst  characters  ever  had 
their  portraits  done  in  this  style.  Eoth  these  very  grave  faults 
are  easily  avoided.  The  inclination  of  the  head  towards  the 
camera  is  caused  chiefly,  as  I  have  said,  by  the  strain  in  turning 
to  a  side  view  of  the  face  when  the  body  is  in  full  front  view. 
If  the  figure  were  turned  to  a  three-quarter  view  towards  the 
light,  the  strain  would  be  lessened,  and  if  the  head  still  leans 
over  too  much,  a  very  slight  movement  of  the  head  by  the 
photographer  would  set  it  upright.  But  I  must  take  the 


opportunity  that  here  presents  itself  of  saying  that  the  less 
the  operator  handles  his  sitter,  the  better.  It  worries  him,  and 
oftener  tends,  except  in  very  skilled  hands,  to  stiffen  the  figure 
rather  than  add  to  its  grace. 

The  defect  in  the  eye,  just  mentioned,  is  caused  entirely  by 
having  the  light  too  low  down,  so  that  the  sitter,  if  he  looks 
straight,  is  dazzled,  and  has  to  look  aside.  There  is  no  reason 
whatever  why  there  should  be  any  light  in  a  studio  lower  than 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE    SITTER. 


47 


5  feet  from  the  ground.  A  studio  of  the  following  section 
answers  every  purpose,  and,  as  the  solid  walls  are  not  less  than 
4  feet  6  inches  high,  the  eye  of  the  sitter  for  a  Eembrandt 
portrait  may  be  looking  at  a  pleasant  picture  instead  of  a  glaring 
light. 


There  is,  apparently,  very  little  glass  used  here,  but  it  will 
be  found  quite  enough.  And  if  a  space  of  clear  glass,  measuring 
5  feet  by  4  feet,  just  behind  and  to  the  side  of  the  sitter,  be  used, 
the  rest  of  the  roof  may  be  obscured,  or  semi-obscured,  leaving 
the  possibility,  however,  of  letting  in  a  little  reflected  light  on 
the  shadowed  side  of  the  head.  The  shadow  pictures  are  very 
much  improved  if  some  gradation  of  light  and  shade  can  be 
obtained  in  the  background,  and  fine  effects  can  be  got  by 
turning  the  face  from  the  light,  and  bringing  it  out  dark  against 
a  light  background. 

The  head-rest  is  now  seldom  used,  and  is  chiefly  famous  for 
the  unmeasured  abuse  it  met  with  from  the  ungrateful  sitters 
for  whose  benefit  it  was  invented,  and  is  still,  in  good  hands,  a 


48  THE    STUDIO. 


great  aid  in  posing.  Objectors  never  stop  to  think  that  it  is  not 
the  instrument  that  is  in  fault,  but  the  clumsy  users  of  it.  I 
notice  in  my  own  practice  that  the  complaints  against  the  rest 
are  not  so  frequent  as  they  were  once  upon  a  time,  and  if  a 
sitter  objects  to  the  rest,  I  feel  certain  that  he  has  been  badly 
treated,  and  had  an  awful  experience  with  some  other  photo- 
grapher, and  make  it  a  point  of  honour  to  induce  him  not  only 
to  submit  to,  but  to  enjoy  it. 

The  rest  should  not  be  treated  as  an  instrument  to  keep  the 
sitter  still,  but  as  a  posing  machine.  One  of  the  most  objection- 
able things  you  can  do  to  a  sitter  is  to  insist  on  his  being  still. 
You  of  course  want  him  to  be  quiet  while  the  exposure  is  going 
on,  but  this  should  result  from  your  general  treatment  of  him, 
rather  than  any  preconceived  notion  he  may  have  brought  with 
him.  He  should  be  so  managed  that  sufficient  stillness  is  a 
natural  result.  During  the  few  seconds'  exposure  that  is  all 
now  necessary,  a  slight  touch  of  the  rest,  properly  applied,  is- 
enough  to  secure  steadiness,  but  its  great  use  is  in  making  slight 
variations  of  the  pose — of  which  more  hereafter — and  the 
confidence  it  gives  the  sitter  that  he  is  not  going  to  spoil  your 
plate  by  moving.  On  the  other  hand,  if  you  dispense  with  the 
rest,  the  sitter  makes  a  desperate  struggle  to  keep  still,  and 
looks  like  it.  Now  the  portrait  of  a  gentleman,  with  an  expres- 
sion of  firm  determination  to  keep  steady,  as  if  rigidity  was  the 
one  absorbing  passion  of  his  life,  is  not  a  pleasant  object  to- 
contemplate. 

The  rest  should  be  a  comfort  instead  of  a  nuisance.  It  should 
be  adjusted  to  the  head,  and  not  the  head  to  the  rest.  It  should 
never  be  applied  until  everything  else  is  ready.  A  sitter  should 
never  have  time  to  feel  how  ridiculous  he  looks,  and  the  longer 
he  is  fixed  to  the  rest,  the  more  this  feeling  obtrudes  itself. 
The  plate  should  be  exposed  as  quickly  as  possible  after  the 
rest  is  placed.  If  a  slight  alteration  strikes  you  as  a  possible 
advantage,  it  is  better  to  give  it  up  than  disturb  the  sitter  at 


MANAGEMENT   OF    THE   SITTER.  49 

this  moment;  but  if  there  is  anything  gravely  wrong  in  the 
pose  or  dress,  it  is  better  to  begin  all  over  again. 

The  rest  should  be  understood  to  be,  and  used  as,  a  delicate 
support  to  the  head  and  figure,  not  a  rigid  fixture  against  which 
the  figure  is  to  lean.  As  used  in  most  studios,  it  is  a  great 
deal  too  heavy.  There  is  no  occasion  whatever  for  the  cum- 
brous iron  supports  so  often  employed.  For  ordinary  portraiture 
I  prefer  a  light,  simple  rest,  without  any  complications — one 
that  can  be  easily  carried  about  after  the  sitter  without  trouble. 
I  have  no  fixed  place  for  the  sitter  in  my  studio,  but  place  him 
in  any  part,  just  as  the  fancy  strikes  me,  and  it  is  here  I  find  a 
light  rest  of  so  much  use.  A  perfect  rest  has  yet  to  be  made. 
It  must  be  moderately  light  and  portable,  and  very  simple. 
The  complicated  movements  of  the  ordinary  machines,  often  with 
chairs  attached,  are  worse  than  useless,  and  very  confusing. 

The  head-rest  is  not  exclusively  a  photographer's  tool ;  it  is 
sometimes  used  by  sculptors.  The  following  curious  extract 
from  Leslie's  "  Autobiographical  Recollections  "  will  show  that 
Chantrey  not  only  used  one  of  these  machines,  but  also  employed 
the  best  substitute  for  our  art  the  science  of  his  time  would 
afford.  Had  he  lived  in  our  day,  he  would  never  have  com- 
menced a  bust  until  he  had  obtained  a  satisfactory  photograph 
of  his  sitter  for  his  guidance. 

"  July  31st,  1836.— In  the  evening  I  went  to  Mr.  Dimlop's.  Mr.  Dun- 
lop  had  been  sitting  to  Chantrey,  who  fixed  the  back  of  his  head  in  a 
wooden  machine,  to  keep  him  perfectly  still,  and  then  drew  with  a  camera- 
lucida  the  profile  and  front  face  of  the  size  of  life.  He  afterwards  gave  a 
little  light  and  shade  to  the  drawings,  and  said,  '  I  shall  not  require  you  to 
sit  still  after  this.'  •  He  said,  '  I  always  determine  in  my  own  mind  the 
expression  to  be  given,  and  unless  I  can  see  the  face  distinctly,  and  with 
that  expression  when  I  close  my  eyes,  I  can  do  nothing.  If  I  can,  I  can 
often  make  the  face  more  like  in  the  absence  of  the  sitter  than  in  his 
presence.' " 


CHAPTER  TIL 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER. 
THE    HEAD  VIGNETTE. 

IN  the  last  chapter  I  left  my  man  hanging,  while  I  went  off 
into  a  digression  on  studios  and  head-rests,  turning  him,  indeed 
— as  well  as  my  chapter — into  a  "  subject "  quite  other  than 
that  intended.  This  is  bad  art.  A  subject  should  never  be 
left  suspended.  Years  ago  there  was  published  a  series  of  por- 
traits of  a  famous  actress  as  she  appeared  reciting  Tennyson's 
sensational  "  Charge  of  the  Light  Brigade,"  a  poem  utterly 
unworthy  of  the  great  poet's  genius,  but  which,  however,  still 
finds  listeners,  if  not  readers.  There  were  seven  poses  in  all, 
and  the  last  of  the  series  left  the  lady  with  arms  extended  in 
the  very  ecstacy  of  declamation;  to  make  the  series  complete, 
and  finish  artistically,  the  photographer  should  have  added 
another  picture  with  arms  down,  and  left  her  in  repose. 

"We  will  continue  the  consideration  of  how  a  head  ought  to  be 
treated. 

The  first  thing  to  decide  when  you  see  your  sitter  should  be  : 
"Which  side  of  his  face  will  make  the  best  picture?"  This 
consideration  seldom  gives  an  experienced  operator  any  trouble. 
To  one  who  is  in  the  habit  of  observing,  the  sides  of  every  face 
differ  so  much,  and  in  such  a  definite  manner,  that  a  glance  is 
all  that  is  necessary  to  settle  the  question;  but  the  young 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE   SITTER. 


51 


photographer  will  want  to  know  how  to  select,  and  have  some 
rule  for  the  selection. 

If  you  will  look  critically  at  a  full  face  (or  the  photograph  of 
a  full  face  would  be  better,  as  it  would  enable  you  to  measure), 
you  will  find  that  the  eyes  are  not  level — one  is  higher  than 
the  other.  This  is  almost  invariable,  and  is  one  of  the  peculiar 
instances  in  which  nature  insists  on  variety  even  where 
uniformity  would  seem  to  be  proper.  If  you  take  a  photograph 
of  the  face  in  a  three-quarter  position,  with  the  eye  that  is 
highest  away  from  you,  the  unevenness  will  be  still  more 
visible;  but  if  you  take  the  other  side  of  the  face,  and  have 


the  highest  eye  nearest  to  the  camera,  the  lower  eye  will  seem 
to  fall  away  naturally,  through  the  effect  of  perspective.  The 
same  facts  apply  to  the  nose,  sometimes  in  a  very  marked  degree ; 
and  it  fortunately  happens,  in  nine  cases  out  of  ten,  that  the 
eyes  and  nose  agree  as  to  which  is  the  best  side  of  the  face. 
"When  they  disagree,  the  portrait  is  seldom  satisfactory.  The 
two  illustrations  are  taken  from  different  sides  of  the  same  face, 
and  show  which  side  should  have  been  taken.  In  the  one  to 
the  right  the  nose  looks  broken,  and  the  eyes  out  of  line ;  in  the 
other  these  defects  are  not  seen. 


52  THE   STUDIO. 


I  keep  an  illustrated  catalogue  of  all  the  portraits  I  take,  and 
on  looking  through  several  volumes,  I  found  confirmed  a  very 
curious  idea  that  was  stated  in  a  "Note"  in  the  PHOTOGEAPHIC 
NEWS.  I  found  that  about  four  out  of  five  of  the  portraits 
were  taken  looking  to  the  right,  showing  that  I  had  in  these 
instances  chosen  the  left  side  as  the  best.  Now,  as  both  ends 
of  my  studio  are  equally  well  lighted,  and  it  is  no  more  trouble 
to  take  one  side  of  the  face  than  the  other,  it  follows  that,  in  my 
judgment,  in  four  out  of  five  cases  the  left  side  was  the  best. 
If  this  is  correct,  the  knowledge  of  it  would  be  of  some  practical 
use  to  those  who  have  to  build  studios  in  a  confined  place,  with 
only  one  end  available^  to  make  it  that  end  on  which  the  left 
side  of  the  face  can  be  best  lighted. 

If  your  sitter  is  not  in  a  good  state  to  be  photographed,  and 
if  it  does  not  endanger  the  loss  of  him  (this  is  a  purely  business 
consideration,  which  is  out  of  place  here),  it  is  much  better  to 
postpone  the  sitting  than  to  risk  taking  an  indifferent  portrait. 
The  other  day  I  saw  that  one  of  my  sitters  was  not  looking  his 
best,  and  asked  him  if  anything  was  the  matter.  "  Well,"  he 
replied,  "  I've  got  a  headache  that  ought  to  be  good  enough  ta 
split  a  planet  into  fragments,  but  I  thought  I  would  keep  my 
appointment."  Now,  it  is  a  good  thing  to  encourage  sitters  to 
be  punctual,  but  I  felt  it  right  to  send  this  one  away  for  a  day 
or  two.  My  friend's  description  of  a  perfect  and  complete 
headache  was  as  good  as  I  had  heard  until  another  friend  said 
he  had  got  an  effervescing  mixture  of  sunstroke  and  neuralgia. 

A  sitter  will  sometimes  want  to  be  taken  "  naturally."  His 
ideas  of  being  natural — "just  as  I  am,  you  know" — is  to 
sprawl  over  the  furniture.  Perhaps  he  will  put  his  hands  in 
his  pockets,  sink  low  in  the  chair,  and  expect  you  to  make  a 
good  head  and  shoulders  of  him.  This  is  an  awkward  customer 
to  manage.  Possibly  the  best  plan  is  to  recommend  him  to  go 
to  the  worst  photographer  he  can  find — one  of  those  who 
advertise  themselves  loudly  as  "  artists,"  without  knowing  the 


MANAGEMENT   OF   THE   SITTER.  53 

meaning  of  the  word  (there  are  plenty  of  them  in  every  town), 
or  to  the  peripatetic  on  the  sands  or  common,  who  will  let  him 
have  his  own  way  entirely,  so  that  he  pays  his  sixpence  in 
advance. 

But,  given  a  decent  sitter  who,  for  the  present  purpose,  let 
us  say,  wants  a  head  and  shoulders — what  is  called  a  vignette 
head — the  question  is,  what  to  do  with  him. 

A  conscientious  photographer  who  desires  to  do  his  best,  and 
who  charges  a  price  that  will  allow  him  to  forget  the  cost  of 
his  materials,  will,  in  this  case,  take  at  least  three  positions — a 
full,  or  nearly  full,  face ;  a  three-quarter ;  and,  if  the  face  will 
bear  it,  a  profile,  or  nearly  profile,  showing  a  little  of  the  off 
eyebrow;  but  if  the  side  face  would  be  too  trying,  then  the 
third  negative  may  be  devoted  to  a  variation  of  expression  in 
one  of  the  other  positions. 

A  simple  head  requires  to  be  properly  composed  as  much  as 
any  other  kind  of  picture,  and  should  not  be  without  variety  of 
line  and  contrast.  If,  with  a  full  face,  the  body  is  also  turned 
full  towards  the  camera,  a  line  drawn  down  the  middle  of  the 
picture  would  divide  it  into  two  halves,  as  nearly  corresponding 
as  variety -loving  nature  will  allow ;  but  if  the  body  is  turned 
a  little  away,  and  the  face  to  the  camera,  there  will  be  variety  of 
line  suggesting  movement  and  life,  especially  if  the  expression 
can  be  made  to  correspond.  For  a  three-quarter  face  it  is  better 
to  turn  the  figure  quite  in  profile,  or  even  showing  a  little  of 
the  back  ;  or  the  figure  may  be  full  and  the  head  turned  away ; 
either  way  will  give  a  lively  and  agreeable  turn  to  the  neck. 
The  same  remarks  will  apply  to  a  profile,  except  that  there 
must  not  be  too  much  strain  in  the  neck,  so  as  to  pitch  the 
head  forwards,  as  already  alluded  to  in  the  last  chapter. 

In  a  "  head,"  the  shoulders  should  be  always  nearly  level, 
and  the  figure  upright.  It  looks  awkward  to  see  one  shoulder 
much  higher  than  the  other,  when  the  rest  of  the  figure  is  not 
shown  to  account  for  the  position.  Some  sitters  are  obstinate 


54 


THE   STUDIO. 


about  this,  and  will  not  sit  upright,  preferring,  as  they  say,  to 
feel  at  ease  and  "  natural,"  as  if  it  were  their  feelings  they 
wanted  photographed,  instead  of  their  appearance.  The  only 
remedy  for  a  bad  case  of  this  kind  is  to  make  your  subject  stand. 
This  usually  improves  the  fall  of  the  shoulders ;  it  is  also  a 
sovereign  cure  for  another  difficulty.  Some  sitters,  if  you  ask 
them  to  sit  upright,  will  think  they  are  complying  with  your 
wishes  if  they  lean  back  in  the  chair  and  stick  their  chins  in 
the  air,  for  there  are  people  who  think  they  are  not  upright 
until  they  are  nearly  falling  backwards.  This  leaning  back  in 
the  chair,  added  to  too  much  twist  to  the  neck,  is  the  cause  of 
nearly  all  the  broken-necked  effects.  A  good  deal  can  be  done 
with  a  skilful  use  of  the  body-rest ;  but  the  best  remedy,  as  I 
have  already  said,  is  to  make  the  subject  stand. 

The  eyes  should  always  go  with  the  head.     Nothing  is  more 


disagreeable  than  to  see  an  eye  looking  out  of  the  corner,  or 
twisted  across  the  face.  The  eyes  of  a  full  or  nearly  full  face 
should  look  full  at  the  camera ;  a  little  above  the  lens  I  prefer,  if 
you  can  trust  your  sitter  not  to  drop  the  eye  as  the  cap  is  removed. 
If  the  head  is  turned  to  the  right,  the  eye  should  go  as  much  to 
the  right ;  if  a  little  more  it  is  no  great  matter,  but  it  should 


MANAGEMENT   OF  THE   SITTER.  55 

never  come  back  again,  or  a  shy  or  frightened  look  will  be  given. 
The  second  illustration  is  the  same  head  exactly  as  the  first,  as  near 
as  I  can  draw  it,  with  the  position  of  the  eyes  only  altered.  The 
first  is  constrained  and  self-conscious,  the  other  easy  and  natural. 

I  am  not  sure  that  I  explain  quite  clearly  what  I  mean  when 
I  say  the  eyes  should  go  with  the  head;  it  would  have  been 
better  if  I  had  exaggerated  the  effect  I  intended  to  condemn  in 
my  illustration.  The  pose  I  deprecate  is  that  seen  in  the 
portraits  by  Lely  and  Kneller,  and  the  painters  of  their  time, 
who  seem  to  have  supposed  that  the  more  a  figure  was  twisted, 
the  more  graceful  it  became.  In  these  portraits  the  figure  would 
be  turned  to  the  right,  the  face  to  the  left,  and  the  eyes  back 
again  to  the  right.  Now,  if  in  this  pose  the  eyes  had  looked  in 
the  same  direction  as  the  head — or,  in  other  words,  to  the  point 
to  which  the  head  is  turning — instead  of  looking  back  again,  the 
effect  would  be  natural  and  graceful,  instead  of  fantastic  and 
artificial.  A  variation  of  this  twisted  posing  is  presented  when 
the  figure  and  eyes  are  full,  and  the  face  turned  away.  This 
does  not  apply  to  a  pose — often  adopted  by  Vandyck  and  other 
great  artists — in  which  the  figure  is  turned  slightly  away,  the 
face  three-quarter  or  nearly  full,  and  the  eyes  quite  full.  In 
this  case  I  hold  that  the  eyes  go  with  the  head,  because  they  are 
both  going  towards  the  same  point. 

Many  sitters  who  look  bright  and  lively  when  they  talk,  sink 
suddenly  into  the  opposite  extreme.  As  they  speak  the  last 
word  their  head  drops,  and  a  sort  of  reactionary  expression 
comes  on ;  this  expression  is  as  much  the  result  of  the  drop  of 
the  head  as  the  alteration  in  the  features,  and  must  be  looked 
out  for  and  counteracted.  If  a  head-rest  is  used  without  any 
support  to  the  back,  this  result  is  almost  inevitable.  Some 
photographers  use  a  posing- chair — sometimes  called  a  vignetting- 
chair — which  supports  the  back  ;  but  I  prefer  to  use  a  back-rest. 
Indeed,  I  use  this  rest  constantly,  and  could  not  do  without  it. 
The  use  of  the  rest  should  be  a  fine  art. 


56  THE   STUDIO. 


Care  should  be  taken  to  have  the  camera  a  proper  height 
with  regard  to  the  head.  If  it  is  raised  so  high  that  the  lens 
looks  down  on  the  sitter,  the  neck  will  be  shortened,  and  the 
shoulders  will  appear  raised.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  camera 
is  too  low,  the  effect  is  perhaps  still  more  disagreeable.  The 
face  is  foreshortened  from  the  chin  to  the  forehead,  and  the 
nostrils  are  unduly  visible. 

The  proportions  of  the  head  in  a  picture  should  have  great 
consideration.  It  is  too  often  the  practice  to  make  vignette 
heads  much  too  large  for  the  space  they  occupy.  A  carte 
vignette  head  should  never  be  larger  than  1£  inch  from  the  top 
of  the  hair  to  the  chin,  and  a  cabinet  should  not  exceed  two 
inches  in  the  same  dimensions. 


CHAPTER  Till. 

POSING   AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE   SITTER. 
THE  THREE-QUARTER  LENGTH— MEN. 

Iff  the  kind  of  picture  we  have  now  under  consideration,  there 
is  more  scope  for  variety  of  pose  than  in  those  which  include 
the  head  and  shoulders  only.  Almost  every  variety  of  pic- 
turesque effect  can  be  brought  to  bear,  both  of  light  and  shade 
and  line. 

The  three-quarter  length  is  generally  supposed  to  include 
the  figure  down  to  the  knees,  but  in  treating  of  it  we  may 
fairly  include  a  proportion  that  takes  in  somewhat  less,  and  is 
more  nearly  a  half-length. 

For  ordinary  every-day  portraiture  of  ordinary  humanity,  no 
great  variety  of  pose  is  necessary — or,  indeed,  admissible.  This 
is  especially  so  as  regards  the  photographic  presentation  of  men. 
If  you  will  go  through  a  modern  exhibition — for  example,  the 
Hoyal  Academy — and  take  a  general  and  comparative  survey  of 
all  those  pictures  which  used  to  be  catalogued  under  the  title  of 
"portrait  of  a  gentleman,"  you  will  find  that  the  variety  in  the 
pose  is  very  limited.  This  is  due  in  a  great  measure  to  the  re- 
straint that  modern  dress  imposes  on  the  artist.  The  masculine 
coat  and  trousers  of  to-day  do  not  admit  of  artistic  arrangement, 
and  any  attempt  to  alter  them  savours  of  affectation.  Adam 
Salomon's  black  velvet  cloak  was  very  picturesque  as  arranged 


58  THE    STUDIO. 


by  his  artistic  hands,  but  it  looked  out  of  place  on  a  Man- 
chester merchant  or  a  book-maker.  Some  of  our  best  portrait  - 
painters  seem  to  have  given  up  all  hope  of  varying  the  position 
of  their  sitters,  and  seat  them  all,  with  rare  exceptions,  in  the 
same  chair  in  endless  succession.  I  do  not  state  this  for  the 
photographer's  imitation ;  he  had  better  always  strive  for  im- 
provement, and  not  give  up  all  effort  as  the  painters  seem  to  do 
when  they  are  elected  into  the  Academic  body,  but  as  some  little 
comfort  for  him  when  his  efforts  to  become  original  fail. 

Photography  has  done  much  to  teach  the  painter.  There  can 
be  no  doubt  that  our  art  has  greatly  improved  portrait  painting. 
"When  photographers  began  to  take  portraits,  portraiture  in 
paint  was  at  its  lowest  ebb ;  it  is  now  at  its  greatest  since  the 
time  of  Gainsborough  and  Reynolds.  Our  art  has  been 
especially  useful  in  teaching  the  painter  what  to  avoid;  it 
has  completely  abolished  the  column  and  curtain.  I  don't 
think  this  once  inevitable  background  has  been  seen  in  the 
Academy  Exhibitions  for  several  years.  It  has  taught  him 
how  to  give  individuality  and  character.  In  every  portrait 
painter's  work  before  the  introduction  of  photography,  one  face 
was  very  like  another,  and  it  has  taught  him  that  convention- 
ality is  only  to  be  tolerated  in  decorative  work. 

But  if  there  is  very  little  variety  open  to  the  operator  in  his 
portraits  of  men,  there  is  one  posture  that  I  should  like  to  see 
entirely  discarded,  and  never  used  any  more.  This  pose  is  hal- 
lowed by  tradition,  and  sanctified  by  use,  for  it  has  been  the  one 
pose  of  photographers  since  the  morning  twilight  of  the  art.  It 
is  the  pose  with  which  the  amateur  begins ;  with  which  the 
professional,  however  capable  of  art  knowledge,  commences; 
and  with  which  the  incapable  spends  all  his  days.  I  give  it 
on  the  next  page  as  an  example  of  what  to  avoid. 

"Who  does  not  know,  who  has  not  been  guilty  of,  this  pose, 
in  which  the  victim  appears  to  be  laid  out  and  trussed,  little 
round  table  and  all?  It  is  all  very  well,  the  young  photo- 


MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER. 


59 


grapher  will  say,  to  tell  me  what  to  avoid — destructive  criticism 
is  always  easy ;  but  I  want  to  be  told  what  to  do.  I  can  only 
reply  by  again  resorting  partly  to  pointing  out  what  to  avoid. 

Let  us  take  a  portrait.  The  subject  is  a  gentleman  of  any 
age  between  twenty-five  and  fifty ;  he  wants  a  standing  por- 
trait. To  begin,  make  him  stand  in  as  easy  an  attitude  as 
possible ;  don't  dictate  to  him  how  he  shall  stand  at  first,  but 
let  him  take  his  own  position,  and  use  his  suggestion  if  good ; 
alter  it  a  little  if  necessary,  but  don't  "  mess  the  figure  about." 
If  it  does  not  easily  "  come,"  make  him  walk  away  and  try 


again.  It  is  possible  he  may  have  an  idea  that  he  ought  to  be- 
upright  when  he  stands  for  a  picture,  and  will  stand  equally  on 
both  legs.  Now,  however  strange  it  may  seem,  human  beings 
seldom  stand  on  both  legs  at  once,  except  in  their  first  and 
second  childhood.  Infants  and  very  old  men  toddle  equally  on 
both  feet.  Between  these  ages  a  person,  when  standing  at  ease, 
rests  on  one  leg,  and  in  walking  it  is  one  or  other  leg  alternately 
that  bears  the  burden.  By  this  means  nature  gives  variety  of 
line,  and  avoids  the  uniformity  it  abhors.  In  posing  a  man, 
strive  to  get  sufficient  variety  to  give  picture squeness.  Do  not 


60  THE    STUDIO. 


let  the  head  be  in  exact  line  with  the  body ;  if  the  figure  is 
turned  full,  let  the  face  be  in  three-quarter  view ;  if  the  figure 
is  slightly  turned  away,  the  face  may  be  full  or  in  profile.  See 
that  there  is  variety  in  the  figure ;  do  not  let  the  hands  appear 
as  two  spots  exactly  opposite  each  other  on  both  sides ;  do  not 
allow  uniformity  in  the  furniture  and  accessories  ;  for  instance, 
if  there  is  a  chair  on  one  side  of  him,  it  would  be  better  not  to 
have  another  on  the  other  side.  I  do  not  like  to  speak  too 
definitely,  for  fear  of  cramping  the  operator  instead  of  helping 
him ;  and  I  can  quite  conceive  cases  where  exactly  the  reverse 
of  what  I  have  recommended  would  be  exactly  what  was 
wanted.  If  possible,  avoid  the  leaning  position — the  pedestal 
and  back-of-chair  business  has  been  thoroughly  overdone.  So 
much  are  some  sitters,  who  often  have  their  portraits  taken, 
used  to  it,  that  they  naturally  ask  for  something  to  lean 
on. 

"  It  makes  me  feel  so  easy  and  natural,"  a  man  will  say ;  but 
is  puzzled  when  asked  if  he  can  ever  remember  leaning  on  a 
pedestal,  and  looking  like  the  monument  of  Shakespeare,  any- 
where but  in  a  photographer's  studio.  I  remember  a  studio,  in 
the  days  of  the  carte-de-visite  mania,  where  the  pedestal  and 
head-rest  were  fixed  institutions,  and  every  figure  was  fitted  to 
them,  all  with  their  legs  crossed,  like  Crusaders  on  their  tombs, 
only  upright. 

To  a  seated  figure  the  same  suggestion  for  variety  will  apply. 
A  man  will  sometimes  think  he  looks  easy  when  he  feels  so, 
and  will  slouch  down  in  a  chair,  put  his  hands  in  his  pockets, 
shrug  up  his  shoulders,  and,  putting  his  foot  up  over  the  knee 
of  the  other  leg,  will  present  the  sole  of  his  boot  as  the  principal 
object  in  the  picture.  But  it  is  "not  thy  sole,  but  thy  soul," 
as  Gratiano  says  to  the  Jew,  that  is  wanted  in  a  portrait,  and 
the  lounger  must  be  shaken  up.  Some  young  men  think  it 
looks  easy  and  graceful  to  sit  astride  on  a  chair,  and  lean  their 
elbows  on  the  back.  To  me  they  look  awkward  and  ungraceful 


MANAGEMENT   OF   THE  SITTER.  61 

in  this  position,  and  all  I  can  say  about  it  is,  that  it  is  just 
allowable  when  it  cannot  be  avoided. 

Old  men  usually  make  admirable  photographs.  There  is  a 
gravity  about  old  age  that  seems  to  suit  photography.  White 
hair  may  be  a  technical  difficulty,  but  it  is  to  be  got  over  by 
judicious  lighting  and  manipulation,  and  difficulty  ought  to  lend 
a  zest  to  all  arts.  Old  people  are  usually  steady  without  much 
effort,  and,  as  a  rule,  they  do  not  care  so  much  how  they  look 
as  younger  people  do,  and  therefore  are  free  from  the  self- 
conscious  look  that  so  sadly  mars  nearly  all  portraits,  whether 
painted  or  photographed.  Seated  positions,  in  arm-chairs  for 
preference,  seem  to  be  most  suitable  for  age. 


CHAPTER  IX, 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE   SITTER. 
THREE-QUARTER  LENGTH— LADIES. 

HITHEETO  I  have  spoken  of  the  sitter  generically  as  "he," 
meaning,  however,  to  include  both  sexes,  just  as  women  and 
children  are  included  in  all  mankind ;  but  as  I  am  writing  this 
chapter  exclusively  on  ladies,  I  must  alter  the  sitter's  designa- 
tion for  the  time  being  to  "  she."  There  is  also  the  apparent 
absurdity,  in  writing  on  this  subject,  of  calling  all  your  models 
"  sitters,"  although  they  may  not  want  seated  portraits  of 
themselves ;  but  the  term  is  so  generally  accepted  and  under- 
stood to  include  all  those  who  go  to  be  represented  either  by 
the  painter  or  photographer,  that  1  shall  continue  to  use  it. 

The  female  costume,  when  it  suits  those  who  order  fashion  to 
have  it  picturesque,  offers  greater  facilities  to  the  artist  who 
desires  variety  in  his  poses  than  ugly  masculine  garments  will 
-admit  of.  Besides  which,  other  reasons  conduce  to  the  making 
of  more  effective  pictures  when  a  lady  is  the  subject.  A  greater 
range  of  expression  is  allowable,  and  the  occupations  and  amuse- 
ments of  ladies  afford  many  motives  and  much  help  to  the  photo- 
grapher, while  the  occasional  beauty  of  the  subject  encourages 
the  operator  by  compelling  him  to  make  really  fine  pictures  in 
spite  of  himself.  There  is  a  natural  grace  about  some  women 
and  children  that  gives  harmony  to  their  slightest  movements, 


MANAGEMENT   OF   THE   SITTER.  63 

and  a  fitness  to  their  most  trivial  acts,  so  that  if  they  only 
move  across  the  room,  the  eye  follows  them  with  a  similar 
kind  of  pleasure  to  which  the  ear  listens  to  melodious  sounds. 

But  it  is  not  how  to  make  "  beauty  go  beautifully  "  that  the 
photographer  wants  to  know,  so  much  as  how  to  manage  and 
make  the  best  of  the  ordinary  sitter  who  comes  to  the  studio  in 
the  course  of  every-day  practice. 

Much  will  depend  on  the  age  of  the  subject,  but  we  will  take 
it  for  the  present  that  she  is  neither  very  old  nor  very  young, 
neither  a  young  girl  nor  an  elderly  matron.  Something  also 
must  be  allowed  for  the  temperament  of  the  sitter;  difficult 
poses  should  never  be  tried  with  nervous  or  awkward  people. 

A  general  rule  might  be  given  in  very  few  words :  Make 
your  pose  very  simple,  but  avoid  the  "front  elevation"  or 
"profile  section"  effect,  to  do  which  you  must  get  variety  in 
the  lines  of  the  figure ;  but  in  doing  so,  avoid  the  twists  and 
contortions  so  much  affected  by  some  photographers.  Try  to 
get  the  feeling  of  life  and  motion. 

To  accomplish  this,  it  is  sometimes  necessary  to  make  your 
subject  walk  round  the  studio,  and  suddenly  stop  at  the  point 
where  you  wish  to  photograph  her,  thus  getting  the  effect  of 
suspended  motion  which  is  often  seen  in  statues,  and  gives  such 
an  effect  of  animation  when  properly  managed.  The  Apollo 
Belvidere  is  a  well-known  example  of  the  kind  of  pose  I  mean. 
The  figure  is  suddenly  arrested  in  its  action  to  watch  the  flight 
of  the  arrow,  and  stands  for  a  moment  in  a  pose  that  gives 
great  variety  of  graceful  lines  without  exaggeration,  and  could 
have  been  easily  photographed.  But  to  come  down  from  the 
classic  to  the  real,  let  us  try  to  sketch  a  figure  photographed  on 
this  principle.  And  I  may  mention  here  that  it  would  be  easy 
to  give  a  set  of  poses  for  imitation,  but  this  would  be  bad  for  the 
student  if  he  did  not  get  at  the  same  time  the  principles  on 
which  the  pose  is  based,  and  learn  the  causes  which  lead  up  to 
the  pose,  as  in  the  present  example. 


64  THE   STUDIO. 


A  lady  walking  past  a  table  slightly  stoops  to  pick  up  a  book 
or  a  flower,  and,  raising  herself,  turns  her  head  to  speak  to  a 
friend.  This  action,  if  made  by  an  easy  and  graceful  figure,  is 
full  of  animation,  and  gives  great  variety.  Sitters  almost  always 
place  both  feet  flat  on  the  ground  as  they  stand  for  a  portrait ; 
this  often  produces  stiffness.  In  the  pose  just  described,  if 
the  left  foot  rests  on  the  toe,  as  in  the  act  of  walking,  the  grace- 


fulness of  the  action  is  much  increased,  and  there  is  more  "  go  " 
in  the  figure. 

The  changes  may  be  rung  on  this  idea  for  representing  figures 
in  suspended  motion.  A  lady  sitting  at  her  table  or  desk  rises 
as  a  friend  enters  the  room  ;  she  picks  up  a  book,  or  buttons  her 
glove.  These  are  natural  actions,  and  anything  is  better  than 
the  strff,  self-conscious  position  so  often  adopted.  In  attempting 
to  give  life  and  motion  to  a  figure,  avoid  going  to  extremes. 
There  are  those  who,  overstepping  the  modesty  of  nature,  put 
too  much  "gush"  into  their  poses.  There  are  also  those  of 
what  might  be  called  the  invertebrate  school,  who  contort  their 


MANAGEMENT   OF   THE    SITTER.  65 

figures  into  ridiculously  strained  attitudes,  in  their  endeavour 
to  make  them  graceful. 

As  a  rule,  for  the  ordinary  lady  sitter,  there  is  nothing  better 
than  the  simple  attitude  a  figure  takes  when  standing  in  a  room 
with  the  hands  together ;  or,  for  the  sake  of  variety,  one  hand 
may  be  on  the  table  or  behind  the  back,  care  being  taken  to 
avoid  any  ostentatious  display  of  pose.  Let  the  art  conceal  the 
art,  and  not  let  the  figure  suggest  the  idea  that  every  limb  and 
finger  and  fold  had  been  adjusted  by  the  operator.  On  the 
other  hand,  it  must  always  be  remembered  that  those  portraits 
which  appear  the  easiest  and  most  natural  owe  their  effect,  not 
to  letting  nature  alone,  but  to  the  skill  of  the  photographer  in 
seeing  at  once  what  wants  correcting,  and  making  the  alteration 
on  the  instant,  before  the  sitter  has  had  time  to  tire.  The  best 
poser  is  he  who  sees  at  once  what  he  wants,  and  knows  the 
readiest  means  of  getting  it.  Some  posers  are  so  skilful  and 
full  of  resource  that  they  take  the  portrait  almost  without 
troubling  the  sitter,  making  the  sitting,  as  it  were,  merely  a 
little  episode  in  the  midst  of  a  pleasant  conversation.  These  are 
the  masters  of  the  art,  and  I  am  afraid  their  number  is  small. 
The  majority  of  photographers  have  to  painfully  feel  their  way, 
and  (the  most  conscientious  of  them,  who  feel  they  must  not 
only  earn  their  money,  but  let  their  customers  see  that  they 
are  earning  it)  fidget  their  sitter  about  with  so  many  alterations- 
and  adjustments,  that  the  resulting  picture  often  represents 
a  much  wearied  sample  of  humanity,  with  all  expression  of  life 
or  feeling  worried  out  of  it. 

Many  photographers  cannot  get  on  without  the  eternal  chair, 
by  which  they  place  every  standing  figure.  It  is  the  abuse 
rather  than  the  use  of  the  chair  that  is  so  objectionable.  The 
heavy  carved  oak  chair  and  prie-dieu  have  been  already  laughed 
out  of  photography,  but  there  is  nothing  to  be  said  against  a 
neatly-designed  drawing-room  chair;  this  piece  of  furniture  ia 
always  useful  when  used  judiciously.  It  is  better  when  its 


66  THE    STUDIO. 


lines  are  cut  up  or  carried  off  by  other  furniture,  such  as  a  table 
behind  it;  or  its  too  formal  lines  may  be  broken  by  throwing 
a  shawl  partly  over  the  back.  A  black  lace  shawl  is  of  infinite 
use  in  a  studio. 

Seated  figures  are  usually  more  easily  managed  than  standing 
ones,  although  Chrysos  says,  in  Pygmalion  and  Galatea : — 

"  The  nature  of  the  seated  attitude 
Does  not  give  scope  for  much  variety." 

There  seems  to  be  so  much  more  for  a  seated  lady  to  do  than 
when  in  the  standing  positions.  Reading,  working,  sewing, 
drawing,  writing,  a  cup  of  tea,  all  lend  their  aid.  A  great 
deal  also  can  be  done  with  a  fan,  which  lends  itself  admirably 
to  a  variety  of  changes  of  pose. 

It  frequently  happens  that,  when  all  other  devices  fail,  a 
passable  portrait  can  be  got  by  making  the  sitter  look  down,  as 
in  reading  a  book,  arranging  flowers,  knitting  or  sewing,  thus 
evading  the  difficulties  of  staring  eyes  and  open  mouths. 

The  mention  of  the  looking-down  pose  somehow  reminds  me 
that  a  few  words  may  be  profitably  said  on  the  hands.  One  of 
the  most  difficult  things  on  the  stage,  I  have  heard  an  old  actor 
say,  is  what  to  do  with  the  hands.  This  is  a  difficulty  that 
occurs  with  fuller  force  to  the  photographer.  Of  great  pictorial 
importance  when  properly  employed,  they  oftener  are  the  cause 
of  a  portrait  being  rejected  than  any  other  part  of  the  picture. 
The  one  great  fault  that  ladies  find  is  that  their  hands  are 
too  large,  even  when  it  can  be  demonstrated  that  they  are  in 
proportion  with  the  head ;  and  they  will  be  found  to  be  always 
so  if  they  have  not  been  taken  with  a  lens  of  too  short  a  focus, 
and  if  they  are  as  sharply  defined  as  the  head.  This  erroneous 
notion  touching  the  exaggerated  size  is  traditionary. 

Before  the  introduction  of  photography,  which  corrected  many 
artistic  mistakes,  artists  used  to  draw  the  hands  so  absurdly 
small  that  when  the  truth  was  seen  in  photographs  it  was  not 
believed.  Still,  there  is  some  truth  in  the  hands  being  too  large 


MANAGEMENT    OF    THE    SITTER. 


67 


in  many  photographs,  and  the  fact  that  to  prevent  this  the  hands 
must  be  in  the  same  plane  as  the  face,  cramps  the  operator  very 
much  in  his  posing.  There  are  positions  of  the  hand  in  which 
it  looks  much  larger  than  in  others,  especially  where  the  broad 
back  of  it  is  seen,  or  where  the  two  hands  are  joined  together  in 
a  broad  light,  and  look,  at  a  little  distance,  like  one  hand. 
When  the  fingers  are  interlaced  the  effect  is  similar,  so  also 
when  a  long  wrist  is  shown  without  being  broken  by  a  bracelet 
or  other  means. 

It  is  better,  if  possible,  to  let  the  hand  take  its  own  position, 
and  if  it  does  not  come  gracefully,  to  try  again.  To  alter  the 
fingers  much  is  seldom  very  successful,  and  if  the  sitter  begins 
to  think  about  her  hand,  it  never  looks  either  graceful  or 
natural.  Care  should  be  taken  that  the  light  does  not  fall  too 
flatly  or  strongly  on  the  hands,  so  as  to  increase  their  apparent 
breadth  or  size. 

A  well-formed  hand  is  a  beautiful  object,  and  of  great  use 
pictorially.  So  much  was  thought  of  it  by  the  painters  of  the 


last  century,  and  affectation  in  posing  and  displaying  the  hands 
was  carried  to  such  a  pitch,  that  in  some  pictures  they  are  the 


68  THE    STUDIO. 


principal  objects,  and  the  heads  are  accessory.  Of  course  the 
great -aim  in  composing  a  portrait  should  be  to  make  the  head 
the  principal  object,  and  the  hands  take  the  second  place.  Care 
should  be  taken  that  the  fingers  curve  gracefully,  and  that  the 
hand  does  not  look  like  a  claw.  That  a  very  little  difference 
in  position  will  make  a  vast  difference  in  effect  is  shown  in 
the  sketches,  from  photographs  of  the  same  hand,  on  the  pre- 
ceding page. 


CHAPTER  X, 


POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER. 
FULL-LENGTH    FIGURES. 


THE  full-length  figure  as  a  portrait  has  "  gone  out."  When  the 
carte-de-visite  was  introduced  it  assumed  this  well-known  form, 
and  a  year  or  two  elapsed  before  there  was  any  change ;  then 
the  head-vignette  came  in.  Photographers  stuck  to  these  two 
forms,  and  resisted  all  attempts  to  add  to  them  for  a  considerable 
time.  Then  the  three-quarter  figure  was  introduced,  until  we 
came  to  that  monstrosity,  the  large  head  that  nearly  fills  the 
whole  space.  This  last  form  of  card  owed  its  origin  to  accident. 
A  firm  of  photographers  who  possessed  a  very  large  stock  of 
negatives  of  famous  people — three-quarter  figure,  whole-plate 
size — finding  that  the  carte  had  quite  spoilt  the  sale  of  their 
8  by  6  portraits,  conceived  the  idea  of  printing  the  heads  and 
issuing  them  as  cartes.  The  ignorant  multitude,  seeing  that  so 
many  celebrated  characters  had  had  their  portraits  taken  in  this 
way,  rushed  to  have  their  own  done  in  the  same  style ;  and  thus 
it  is  that  even  to  this  day  we  are  sometimes  obliged  to  do  these 
monstrously  out  of  proportion  cards.  Some  of  the  earliest  full- 
length  cartes-de-visite  were  pictorial  gems.  They  were  done  by 
masters  of  posing  and  picture-making.  The  art  had  not  gone 
into  the  hands  of  the  trade  then ;  prices  had  not  fallen  below  the 
usual  guinea ;  and  photographers  could  afford  to  give  a  picture 


70  THE    STUDIO. 


instead  of  a  map.  Cartes  of  that  time  by  Disderi  or  Silvy  are 
still  beautiful  in  pose  and  effect.  Then  the  art  as  an  art  fell  upon 
evil  times.  It  struck  a  photograph  maker  that  "  ten  for  ten 
shillings  "  would  be  a  good  cry  to  go  to  the  public  with ;  and 
it  succeeded,  commercially,  for  sitters  followed  like  flocks  of 
sheep.  They  were  collected,  after  paying  their  money,  in  a  room  ; 
a  door  was  opened  about  every  five  minutes,  and  a  sitter  ordered 
through  it  into  the  studio,  where  he  was  fixed  up  against  the 
head-rest  (always  ready),  exposed,  and  shown  through  another 
door,  and  left  to  find  his  way  down  stairs.  There  was  no 
thought  given  to  variety  of  pose  or  light  and  shade ;  the  only 
consideration  was  how  to  get  the  sitters  through  the  studio  fast 
enough.  No  proofs  were  submitted ;  the  sitter  had  to  be  con- 
tent with  whatever  the  manufacturer  chose  to  send  him.  In 
those  days  people  were  almost  compelled  against  their  will  to 
carry  their  cartes  in  their  pocket  for  the  purposes  of  exchange, 
and  many  did  not  care  for  the  quality  of  the  portraits,  so  they 
could  observe  the  "  social  custom  "  cheaper.  This  was  scarcely 
fair  to  those  who  went  to  the  best  photographers  and  paid  a  good 
price;  and  people  objected  to  exchange  the  beautiful  little 
pictures  by  T.  E.  Williams,  costing,  perhaps,  seven  and  sixpence 
each,  for  shilling  failures  manufactured  by  a  company. 

But  this  is  not  a  history,  and  I  must  return  from  this 
digression. 

The  full-length  figure,  then,  is  not  so  much  in  vogue  as  it  was 
twenty-five  years  ago.  It  was  never  a  favourite  of  mine  for 
men's  portraits,  for  I  cannot  be  induced  to  take  any  interest  in 
boots  and  trousers;  but  it  was  useful  for  ladies'  portraits, 
especially  when  dresses  were  worn  long;  they  were  not  so- 
easily  managed  during  the  short-skirted  period,  and  I  am  not 
sure  that  it  was  not  the  kind  of  dress  that  checked  the  full-length 
portraits.  The  declension  of  crinoline  also  was  another  check,  for 
it  was  found  difficult  to  fill  up  the  cabinet  form  of  picture  with 
the  thin  figures  that  succeeded  the  monstrous  balloon  figures  of  a 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE    SITTEK.  71 

quarter  of  a  century  ago.  The  full  length  is  still  useful,  and 
will,  I  think,  become  more  prevalent.  It  still  affords  the  best 
way  of  showing  gorgeous  dresses,  fancy  costumes,  and  some 
portraits,  such  as  those  of  girls  between  the  age  of  nine  and 
fifteen.  There  is  a  great  difficulty  in  showing  the  age  between 
these  periods.  A  girl  of  thirteen  or  fourteen  will  often  look 
much  older  in  her  portrait  if  some  way  is  not  taken  to  show  that 
she  is  a  young  girl,  such  as  showing  that  she  is  wearing  a  short 
frock  ;  and  here  it  is  that  the  full-length  is  appropriate. 

A  full-length  admits  of  a  more  florid  treatment  than  any  other 
style  of  picture.  A  more  elaborate  make-up  of  the  furniture 
and  surroundings  is  permissible,  and  pictorial  backgrounds  may 
be  employed.  For  ladies'  portraits  it  admits  of  a  greater  variety 
of  pose  and  effect,  but  it  is  not  so  easy  to  make  a  pleasing  picture 
of  the  whole  length  of  a  gentleman ;  there  does  not  appear  to  be 
enough  of  him  to  fill  the  picture ;  he  is  too  long  for  his  breadth, 
and  he  almost  always  looks  stuck  up  to  be  shot  at.  Let  us 
finish  off  the  gentleman  first,  as  he  presents  the  greatest  difficulty. 
The  problem  is,  how  to  produce  a  full-length  portrait  of  a  man 
so  that  he  shall  look  like  a  gentleman  at  his  ease,  without  a 
preposterous  look  of  attempted  dignity,  self-consciousness,  or 
defiant  swagger  on  the  one  hand,  or  feeble  inanity  on  the  other. 
This  is  often  attempted,  but  seldom  comes  off.  It  is  impossible 
to  give  rules  and  regulations  in  this  case,  and  all  that  is  left  for 
me  to  do  is  to  tell  you  what  to  avoid.  If  for  a  standing  figure, 
get  some  idea  of  the  posture  you  think  would  suit  the  case  in 
hand,  and  arrange  the  furniture  so  that  it  should  lead,  as  it 
were,  to  the  pose  you  require.  Then  get  the  model  to  stand  in 
the  place  you  have  prepared  for  him,  and  instantly  take 
advantage  of  all  accidents.  He  may  not  go  into  the  pose  you 
had  in  your  mind,  but  if  he  is  not  thinking  intently  on  doing 
his  best — which  exercise  of  the  faculties  spoils  half  the  portraits 
taken — he  will  perhaps  assume  a  better.  This  you  must  seize 
at  once.  It  will  probably  require  some  slight  alteration,  some 


72  THE   STUDIO. 


slight  turn  of  the  head,  or  variation  in  the  position  of  the  arm. 
These  are  easily  made,  and  can  often  be  done  without  the  model 
knowing  much  about  it.  For  example,  if  you  want  him  to 
raise  his  arm,  with  his  hand  on  his  hip,  if  you  will  assume  this 
position  yourself,  you  will  find  in  most  cases  he  will  with 
unconscious  imitation  follow  your  lead.  This  will  not  occur  to 
a  blundering  operator,  one  who  does  not  seem  to  know  his  own 
mind ;  but  the  skilled  operator  appears  to  have  a  kind  of  magnetic 
influence  on  his  sitter  which  is  both  curious  and  useful. 

All  I  have  said  in  the  chapter  on  three-quarter  lengths  as  to 
variety,  movement,  animation,  &c.,  applies  here,  and  need  not 
be  repeated ;  but  in  a  full-length  there  is  more  scope  for  what 
may  be  called  technical  art  than  in  any  other  form  of  portrait. 
There  is  room  for  the  photographer  to  show  his  knowledge  of 
composition,  a  subject  into  which  I  have  entered  fully  in  "  Pic- 
torial Effect "  and  "  Picture-Making  by  Photography."  The 
student  has,  I  hope,  read  these  little  essays,  and  will  know  how  to 
arrange  his  accessories  so  as  to  get  balance,  variety,  and  contrast. 

To  make  good  full-length  portraits  of  ladies  is  a  comparatively 
easy  matter.  They  are  nearly  always  picturesque  in  themselves, 
and,  except  when  an  insanity  of  ugliness  seizes  those  who 
command  the  fashions,  as  it  did  when  the  order  for  wearing 
crinolettes  was  issued,  their  dress  lends  itself  to  the  needs  of  the 
artist.  Here  again  I  have  said,  in  a  former  chapter,  everything 
that  is  necessary  regarding  the  arrangement  of  the  figure,  for 
what  applies  to  the  three-quarter  will  apply  nearly  to  the  full- 
length  ;  but  I  may  add,  what  I  think  has  been  omitted  before, 
that  a  lady  should  never  be  seated  in  a  very  low  chair  ;  however 
easy  and  natural  it  may  look  in  life,  it  often  results  in  the 
representation  of  a  mere  bundle  of  clothes  in  a  photograph ;  and 
if  a  lady  is  seated  in  a  high-backed  chair  it  is  well  to  avoid 
letting  the  back  of  the  chair  rise  above  each  shoulder,  which 
often  produces  the  appearance  of  deformity. 

It  is  difficult  to  say  anything  definite  about  the  posing  of 


MANAGEMENT    OF    THE    SITTER.  73 

ladies  without  taking  the  style  of  dress  into  consideration.  We 
have  passed  through  a  period  of  seven  years  distinguished  as 
being  the  most  picturesque  and  beautiful  in  regard  to  ladies* 
dress  that  the  world  has  seen  for  centuries.  .2Estheticism, 
however  it  might  be  sneered  at  by  the  unthinking,  or  brought 
into  contempt  by  its  too  enthusiastic  votaries,  did  wonders  for 
what  is  known  as  taste.  The  reaction  that  has  come  has  been 
fortunately  only  partially  successful.  The  tyrants  who  rule 
over  fashion,  for  trade  purposes,  have  perhaps  for  the  first  time 
in  the  world's  history  been  partly  defeated.  They  ordered  that 
beauty  shall  be  abolished  for  a  season,  and  ugliness  reign.  The 
preposterous  forms  in  which  some  women  now  appear  is  absurd. 
The  curious  thing  is  that  they  don't  see  it  themselves,  and 
laugh  in  each  other's  faces;  but  they  don't  even  smile  at  one 
another.  I  have  just  photographed  a  short  lady  who,  by  the 
curious  arrangement  of  her  dress,  looked  so  like  a  bantam  that 
I  almost  expected  her  to  crow  ! 

But  the  reign  of  ugliness  is  only  partly  successful.  There 
was  a  great  revolt  against  the  revolution  never  before  known 
in  the  history  of  fashion.  Women  are  now  not  the  absolute 
slaves  to  the  dictates  of  fashion  that  they  have  hitherto  shown 
themselves  to  be  throughout  the  ages.  Some  of  them  have 
been  educated,  and  have  learned  that  taste  does  not  consist 
entirely  in  dressing  to  order  to  suit  trade  purposes.  Therefore, 
the  most  sensible,  chiefly  the  wives  and  daughters  of  artists, 
combined  together  and  signed  the  pledge  against  crinolettes! 
"We  owe  it  to  this  that  there  are  still  women  to  be  seen  who  do 
not  look  ridiculous,  and  who  can  afford  to  stand  for  full-length 
portraits.  In  the  old  crinoline  times  a  lady  used  to  justify 
herself  for  her  inflated  appearance  with  the  pretence,  "  I  must 
not  be  singular."  That  excuse  no  longer  holds.  So  many 
sensible  women  still  cling  to  the  good  taste  they  have  learnt 
during  the  interregnum  of  crinoline,  that  there  is  no  pretext  for 
wearing  it  except  absence  of  taste  or  a  determination  to  blindly 
follow  the  dictates  of  fashion  at  all  costs. 


CHAPTER  XL 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER. 
GROUPS. 

THE  arrangement  of  a  portrait  group  of  figures  is  one  of  the  most 
difficult  things  to  succeed  in  accomplishing  perfectly  in  photo- 
graphy; more  difficult,  certainly,  than  the  composition  of  a 
picture  that  would  take  a  much  higher  rank  in  art,  but  of  which 
the  materials  were  more  under  the  command  of  the  artist  as 
regards  selection  and  disposition.  The  portrait  group  is  often 
nothing  better  than  a  pile  of  humanity  fitted  together  like  a 
dissected  puzzle;  a  heterogeneous  conglomeration  of  human 
atoms,  and  sometimes  dogs,  not  one  of  which  has  any  artistic 
relation  to  another;  agreeing  in  nothing  except  that  each 
individual  of  it  shall  keep  rigid  and  stare  at  the  lens.  The 
painters  also  have  felt  the  difficulty  of  making  such  an  arrange- 
ment of  a  group  that  the  results  should  be  a  picture  without  any 
sacrifice  of  the  portraits.  These  things  are  managed  better  now 
than  they  were  before  the  introduction  of  photography.  Every- 
one is  familiar  with  the  ordinary  family  picture  of  orange- 
holding  or  mythological  women  and  children  immortalised  by 
Goldsmith ;  or,  as  Byron  describes  a  family  group — 
"  A  lady  with  her  daughters  or  her  nieces, 
Shine  like  a  guinea  and  seven-shilling  pieces." 

The  photographer  is  nearly  always  heavily  handicapped  by 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE    SITTER.  75 

having  to  give  an  equally  good  portrait  of  each  individual  in 
the  group,  while  one  of  the  great  principles  of  art  is  that  one 
component  of  a  picture  shall  be  more  prominent  and  conspicuous 
than  another.  In  a  pictorial  group  a  back  is  often  useful  as  a 
contrast  to  the  other  figures  ;  but  this  is  not  permissible  in  such 
groups  as  are  usually  demanded  from  the  photographer.  Every 
face  must  present  a  favourable  portrait,  independent  of  the 
others ;  no  figure  must  be  sacrificed  for  the  sake  of  pictorial 
effect,  and  therefore  there  can  be  little  contrast  or  subordina- 
tion, so  necessary  in  artistic  arrangement.  This  difficulty  is 
felt  by  painters  who  can  devote  time  and  attention  to  each 
figure,  and  who  also  have  the  great  advantage  of  being  able 
to  place  their  figures  on  different  planes.  This  absolute  ne- 
cessity for  placing  all  the  figures  in  one  plane,  so  that  they  may 
all  be  in  focus,  is  not  so  stringent  as  it  was  before  the  introduc- 
tion of  gelatine  plates.  We  can  now  employ  lenses  that  cover  a 
greater  depth  of  focus  than  the  old  portrait  lenses,  and  this 
enables  us  to  get  greater  separation  in  the  figures. 

The  group  is  the  one  thing  that  the  photographer  dreads, 
especially  if  there  is  to  be  a  baby  or  young  child  in  it,  for  a& 
the  weakest  link  is  the  strength  of  the  chain,  so  everything 
depends  upon  the  quietude  of  a  part  that  can  only  be  depended 
on  to  move.  However  well  the  photographer  may  have  ar- 
ranged the  other  figures,  and  however  strong  may  have  been  hia 
injunctions  to  them  as  to  how  they  should  stand,  and  in  which 
direction  they  should  turn  their  faces  during  the  exposure,  they 
have  to  be  vigilantly  looked  after,  and  this  is  almost  impossible 
while  you  have  to  devote  all  your  attention  to  keeping  quiet  a 
restless  child.  Moreover,  the  baby  is  always  expected  to  be 
made  a  conspicuous  point  in  the  picture,  and  it  is  so  compara- 
tively small  an  object  that  it  forms  nothing  more  than  a 
minute  speck  in  the  group.  It  is  my  experience  that  few 
people  have  any  idea  how  small  a  baby  is  until  they  see  it 
in  the  centre  of  a  group  of  grown-up  persons. 


76  THE    STUDIO. 


Groups  are  taken  both  in  the  studio  and  out  of  doors.  "We 
will  begin  with  the  former. 

Eejlander  used  to  say  that  it  tasks  the  skill  and  attention  of 
the  photographer  quite  enough  to  see  that  the  arrangement, 
lighting,  and  expression  of  one  figure  is  perfect,  and  he  never 
ventured  upon  more,  if  he  could  help  it,  except  in  combination 
pictures.  But  portrait  photographers  cannot  always  select  their 
subjects,  and  must  make  the  best  of  the  material  brought  to 
them.  Now,  the  most  frequent  group  upon  which  the  photo- 
grapher is  called  to  operate  is  that  which  is  composed  of  two 
persons,  often  children — I  hope  to  give  the  latter  a  chapter  to 
themselves — but  often  of  grown-up  people,  and  perhaps  most 
frequently,  in  holiday  towns,  young  people  on  their  honeymoon, 
who  always  seem  to  be  animated  with  the  very  praiseworthy 
desire  to  have  their  portraits  taken  in  their  new  relation. 
This  is  one  of  the  easiest  groups  to  take  if  managed  well,  but 
one  of  the  most  difficult  if  it  is  trifled  with.  As  a  rule,  the 
best  composition  can  be  got  if  the  lady  is  in  a  standing  position, 
and  the  gentleman  sitting.  It  need  not  be  in  a  chair  or  in  any 
very  formal  attitude,  but  on  a  table,  or  the  end  of  a  balus- 
trade. This  latter  accessory,  like  all  imitations,  may  be  very 
.good  or  very  bad ;  it  should  not  look  clean-cut  and  new,  and 
care  should  be  taken  not  to  make  it  prominent.  If  the  picture 
under  consideration  is  to  be  a  three-quarter  length — the  most 
convenient  form,  perhaps — very  little  of  the  balustrade  will 
show.  Suppose,  then,  the  gentleman  sitting  on,  and  the  lady 
standing  beside  it.  They  need  not  be  looking  at  each  other ;  it 
is  not  often  that  a  young  couple  can  do  this  under  the  circum- 
stances without  laughing,  but  a  common  source  of  interest  should 
be  found  or  imagined.  It  is  easy  to  suppose  they  were  talking 
to  a  friend  who  does  not  appear  in  the  picture,  or  that  their 
attention  is  called  to  some  interesting  object.  Resort  should 
be  had  to  any  device  to  give  the  effect  of  life  and  movement 
to  the  group,  and  animation  to  the  heads,  and  to  take  away 


MANAGEMENT   OF   THE    SITTER. 


77 


that  uneasy  and  penitential  look  of  being  sorry  for  it,  so  often 
seen  in  pictures  of  the  kind.  Here  are  a  couple  of  sketches  of 
variations  on  this  theme,  which  may  serve  as  hints  for  arrange- 
ment. 


"Where  the  balcony  is  used,  or  any  other  outdoor  accessory,  it 
is  well  to  use  also  an  outdoor  background. 

Very  agreeable  pictures  may  be  made  with  two  young  ladies 
for  the  subject.  In  this  case  there  are  plenty  of  motives  for  the 
picture.  The  occupations  of  ladies  seem  to  lend  themselves  to 
pictorial  effect. 

It  is  perhaps  easier  to  make  a  well-composed  group  of  three 
figures  than  of  two.  With  two  it  is  sometimes  difficult  to  get 
variety  of  line,  or  a  picturesque  general  form  to  the  group ;  but 
with  three  figures  the  opportunities  for  variety,  contrast,  and  a 
pyramidal  form  to  the  group,  are  much  greater.  So  that  the 
unity  of  the  group  is  preserved,  the  greatest  amount  of  variety 
of  form  should  be  sought  for.  Variety  in  position  of  the  heads 
can  easily  be  got.  It  is  possible  with  almost  any  three  figures 
to  arrange  the  heads  so  that  they  do  not  come  exactly  in  a  line 


78  THE    STUDIO. 

with  each  other.     For  instance,  it  would  be  possible  to  arrange 
the  heads  formally,  thus — 

0 
0     0 

but  it  is  quite  as  easy  and  much  more  pleasant  to  break  the 
uniformity,  and  arrange  them  thus — 


0 


0 


0 


The  same  principle    is  carried   out   in   the   group   of   three 
children — 


If  more  than  three  figures  are  required  in  a  group,  it  is  better 
to  turn  the  camera  on  its  side,  and  make  a  horizontal  picture  of 
it.  Indeed,  in  many  cases  when  only  three  are  included,  the 
horizontal  form  is  very  useful,  as  in  the  following  example. 

By  placing  three  children  at  a  table,  the  difficulties  of  feet 
and  legs  are  got  rid  of,  and  the  heads  can  be  got  larger  without 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE    SITTER. 


79 


making  the  children  look  older  than  they  are,  the  table  and  book 
suggesting  scale.     When  the  heads  are  all  nearly  of  the  same 


height,  variety  may  be  got  by  placing  one  of  them  at  a  distance 
from  the  other  two. 

In  a  group  of  adults,  it  is  well  to  get  some  centre  of  interest, 
such  as  reading  a  letter,  as  in  the  last  illustration  to  this 


chapter ;  but  care  must  always  be  taken  not  to  sacrifice  likeness 
to  composition.  One  of  the  chief  difficulties  is  to  get  the  heads 
close  together  without  appearing  forced  and  unnatural. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER, 
OUTDOOR  GROUPS, 

WHEN  a  group  is  to  consist  of  more  than  three  or  four  individuals, 
it  is  often  convenient  to  take  it  out  of  doors.  There  are  several 
advantages  in  getting  out  of  the  studio ;  you  are  not  cramped 
for  room,  and  need  not  pile  your  sitters  together,  as  you  are 
often  compelled  to  do  in  the  small  space  available  in  most  studios. 
The  exposure  will  be  much  quicker,  taking  not  more  than  one 
or  two  seconds  with  a  rapid  rectilinear  lens,  and  smaller  dia- 
phragms may  be  used  than  would  be  possible  in  the  studio ;  the 
greater  depth  of  focus  thus  gained  allowing  much  wider  freedom 
in  the  artistic  arrangement  of  the  group. 

An  outdoor  group  too  often  represents  a  mass  of  figures  placed 
one  over  the  other  on  a  bank,  with  perhaps  a  brick  wall  for  a 
background,  without  any  attempt  at  artistic  arrangement,  like 
the  sketch,  which  is  copied  from  a  photograph,  or  a  row  of 
figures  set  up  to  be  photographed,  without  any  consideration  a& 
to  their  arrangement,  except  to  get  them  in  focus.  This  latter 
disposition  is  sometimes  caused  by  the  impossibility  of  getting 
any  help  from  the  formation  of  the  ground  or  place  where  the 
photograph  has  to  be  taken,  for  it  nearly  always  happens  that 
the  large  groups  are  taken  "  at  home,"  and  the  photographer 
must  do  the  best  with  the  materials  he  can  find.  He  should 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE    SITTER. 


81 


look  out  for  and  take  advantage  of  any  spot  that  would  aid  him 
in  breaking  up  his  group,  and  giving  variety  to  the  general 
forms  ;  if  he  should  find  a  picturesque  set  of  steps,  he  may  con- 
sider himself  fortunate ;  even  one  or  two  steps  are  better  than 
nothing.  In  selecting  his  background,  he  should  endeavour  to 
secure  one  with  a  broad  expanse  of  light,  such  as  a  light  wall, 
if  not  too  blank.  Much  detail  is  objectionable,  as  it  interferes 
with  the  figures.  The  worst  background,  but  the  one  that  is- 


often  est  used  for  groups,  consists  of  foliage,  especially  when 
laurel  or  any  shrubs  with  large  shining  leaves  have  place.  The* 
effect  of  the  white  spots  produced  by  the  glittering  foliage, 
especially  when  out  of  focus,  is  very  disagreeable. 

I  give  an  illustration  in  which  a  flight  of  steps  leading  up  to 
the  door  of  an  old  Gothic  house  has  greatly  aided  the  photo- 
grapher in  ananging  a  portrait  group. 

When  you  have  to  arrange  a  group,  you  should  begin  by 

G 


82 


THE   STUDIO. 


finding  out  the  most  important  persons  in  the  company,  so  that 
you  may  assign  them  conspicuous  places.  In  a  short  time  you 
will  be  able  to  discover  "  the  funny  man."  There  is  always  one 
in  every  group,  who  thinks  it  a  rare  joke  to  make  some  of  the 
others  laugh  and  spoil  the  negative.  More  groups  are  damaged 
by  this  idiot  than  by  any  other  cause.  Everything  must  give 
way  to  his  wit,  and  it  takes  a  spacious  magnanimity  to  endure 
his  buffoonery.  You  must  neutralise  him,  or  you  will  do  no 


good.  If  you  have  courage  enough,  go  boldly  up  to  him,  and 
say  something  to  this  effect : — "So  you  are  the  funny  man,  are 
you  ?  If  I  can  get  on  with  you,  I  can  easily  manage  all  the  rest. 
If  you  will  kindly  suppress  yourself  for  a  few  minutes,  and  let 
me  have  my  turn,  I  shall  be  much  obliged."  He  takes  this 
usually  in  one  of  two  ways — either  he  is  a  good  fellow  who  sees 
a  brother-joker  in  you,  and  does  all  he  can  to  help  you ;  or  he 
Bulks.  Either  way  will  suit  your  purpose.  In  the  illustration 
you  will  easily  recognise  the  suppressed  funny  man  in  the  one 


MANAGEMENT   OF   THE   SITTER.  83 

set  against  the  wall,  where  he  makes  a  capital  balance  to 
the  principal  group,  and  looks,  in  the  original  photograph,  as  if 
he  had  not  quite  made  up  his  mind  whether  he  ought  to  be 
ashamed  of  himself  or  not. 

By  this  time  you  have  got  to  some  knowledge  of  the  different 
members  of  the  group,  and  have  settled  in  your  mind,  approxi- 
mately, how  they  are  to  be  arranged.  When  you  have  quite 
made  up  your  mind,  and  not  till  then,  and  when  the  camera  is 
quite  ready,  place  your  figures.  Don't  make  experiments  or 
changes  if  you  can  help  it;  in  other  words,  don't  look  like  a 
muff,  but  let  the  members  of  the  group  see  that  you  know  what 
you  are  about,  and  mean  to  carry  out  the  arrangement  that  you 
have  mentally  formed. 

I  have  seen  operators  make  an  ostentatious  display  of  the 
trouble  they  were  taking,  as  if  they  were  expected  to  earn 
their  money  by  the  sweat  of  their  brow,  making  numerous 
changes  until  they  wearied  out  their  victims.  People  are  quite 
up  to  this  sort  of  display  now,  and  laugh  at  it — until  it  becomes 
too  serious. 

In  a  well-designed  group  the  principal  rules  of  art  will  be 
observed,  especially  variety,  balance,  contrast,  and  breadth. 
Every  line  and  form  will  be  so  arranged  that  a  series  of  pyra- 
mids, intersecting  and  mingled  with  each  other,  are  created. 
In  the  illustration,  those  to  whom  it  was  thought  advisable  to 
give  most  prominence  are  in  the  centre,  and  form  a  pyramidal 
group  to  themselves,  but  they  become  part  of  a  series  of  pyra- 
mids, all  blended  into  one,  of  which  the  top  of  the  arch  of  the 
door  is  the  apex.  It  may  also  be  noticed  of  what  extreme  value 
a  bit  of  pure  black  or  white  becomes  when  in  the  right  place. 
In  the  photograph — it  is  not  so  easy  to  show  it  in  the  small  cut 
— the  white  hat  of  the  standing  figure  to  the  right  absolutely 
redeems  the  group  from  failure.  Imagine  it  away,  and  there  is 
no  artistic  solidity  in  the  group.  This  one  small  spot  of  white 
in  the  right  place  keeps  everything  together. 


84 


THE   STUDIO. 


In  the  second  group  the  place  was  different,  and  there  was  not 
so  good  an  opportunity  of  forming  a  fine  group.  The  ground  was 
flat,  and  there  was  no  natural  means  of  raising  any  of  the  figures 
above  the  others  ;  the  photographer  had  therefore  to  be  content 
to  break  the  line  by  seating  some  of  his  figures,  and  making 
others  bend  as  though  talking  to  them.  By  this  means  he  suc- 
ceeded in  forming  a  series  of  varied  pyramidal  forms  running 
into  and  connected  with  each  other,  so  that  the  general  effect 
should  not  be  scattered.  There  should  always  be  a  "  oneness" 


in  the  group ;  the  string  should  run  through  all  the  beads,  but 
should  be  more  felt  than  seen. 

There  is  another  vast  difference  between  the  two  groups ;  the 
first  has  for  its  surroundings  a  corner  of  "a  very  fine  Tudor  Hall, 
partly  overgrown  with  old  English  shrubs ;  the  second  is  a  sham 
Gothic  battlemented  verandah,  protecting  a  large  French  window 
— an  incongruous  mixture — and  the  foreground  consists  of  the 


MANAGEMENT   OF    THE    SITTER.  85 

geraniums,  calceolarias,  violas,  and  other  kindred  plants  of  an 
Italian  garden. 

There  are  some  disadvantages  about  taking  groups,  and  por- 
traits generally,  out  of  doors,  the  chief  of  which  is  the  difficulty 
with  the  expressions  from  the  excess  of  light.  Some  people 
are  more  affected  by  this  than  others ;  these  should  be  carefully 
looked  after,  and  so  arranged  that  the  light  should  be  of  the 
least  annoyance  to  them.  A  portrait  group  should  never  be 
taken  in  sunlight  if  there  is  any  possibility  of  avoiding  it. 

It  sometimes  happens  that  you  have  to  get  some  other  hand 
to  expose.  If  you  have  to  depend  on  a  quite  inexperienced 
person,  it  is  as  well  to  explain  to  him  that  the  cap  must  be 
removed  from  before  the  lens  as  well  as  off  it.  I  have  sometimes 
seen  the  cap  taken  off  and  held  in  front  of  the  lens.  There 
is  a  certain  butler  who  exposes  a  group  in  which  the  writer 
annually  appears,  who  talks  learnedly  of  seconds  and  fractions 
of  seconds,  and  firmly  believes  that  he  takes  the  photographs. 


CHAPTER  XIII, 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER. 
CHILDREN. 

THEBE  was  a  time  when  children  were  looked  upon  with  dread 
by  the  photographer,  and  I  knew  two  or  three  studios  where 
they  were  absolutely  refused.  This  was  in  the  days  when  sitters 
were  as  plentiful  as  blackberries  in  autumn,  and  professional 
pleasure  in  overcoming  difficulties  was  quite  subsidiary  to  the 
number  of  guineas  taken. 

The  true  photographer  will  always  take  delight  in  a  difficult 
sitter,  just  as  a  surgeon  does  in  a  beautiful  case  of  compound 
fracture,  or  a  physician  in  some  obscure  disease.  To  go  on 
exposing  a  long  succession  of  plates  on  easy  subjects  soon 
becomes  monotonous ;  it  is  when  a  sitter  calls  for  your  reserve 
powers  that  he  becomes  interesting.  There  are  certainly  some 
bad  sitters  who  are  very  depressing,  with  no  redeeming  points 
about  them,  such  as  those  who  begin  by  saying  they  hate  being 
taken,  following  this  pleasant  observation  up  with  the  worn-out 
joke  about  it  being  as  bad  as  going  to  the  dentist.  It  is  a  very 
curious  thing  how  they  all  bring  this  ancient  pleasantry  out 
as  if  it  was  perfectly  original,  and  a  fine  sample  of  wit.  It 
is  not  very  exciting  amusement  to  work  this  sort  of  customer 
round  into  a  happy  frame  of  mind ;  but  there  is  to  me  something 
almost  fascinating  about  a  fractious  three-year-old  who  objects 
to  have  his  portrait  taken. 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE   SITTER.  87 

In  a  case  of  this  kind  it  is  your  duty  to  so  work  upon  that 
child  that  he  shall  not  only  willingly  do  all  you  require,  but 
shall  be  so  delighted  with  you  that  he  shall  howl  when  he  is 
taken  away  after  the  operation,  and  will  only  be  pacified  by  a 
promise  that  he  shall  come  again. 

"  How  is  this  to  be  done  ?  "  may  well  be  asked.  There  are 
two  things  of  primary  importance.  The  child  must  not  be 
forced,  and  mothers  and  nurses  must  be  rigidly  suppressed. 
"When  I  have  had  a  few  minutes'  interview  with  a  child,  I  easily 
discover  if  it_  has  been  worried,  and  spoilt  for  my  purpose  by 
some  bungling  photographer  who  has  so  frightened  it  that  it 
dreads  to  enter  a  studio  ;  or  if  it  has  been  — shall  I  say  tampered 
with  ? — by  the  mother  or  nurse.  These  latter  will  think  they 
are  doing  the  right  thing  when  they  solemnly  impress  upon  the 
little  sitters  that  they  must  be  very  good  and  keep  quite  still ; 
but  their  well-intentioned  warnings  produce  exactly  the  reverse 
effect  to  what  is  wanted.  The  child  that  insists  upon  being 
good  is  an  unmitigated  nuisance ;  he  will  do  everything  you 
ask  him  to  do,  and  looks  as  wooden  as  an  awkward  lay  figure. 

"With  the  great  majority  of  children  the  battle  is  won  or  lost 
at  the  first  introduction.  The  clever  photographer  will  decide 
at  a  glance  whether  the  child  belongs  to  one  of  these  classes — 
tlie_fearless  child  who  takes  the  sitting  as  part  of  the  day's 
occupation,  and  enjoys  it ;  the  nervous  child,  who  really  would 
be  good,  but  has  a  constitutional  fear  of  any  new  experience; 
and,  worst  of  all,  the  shy  child.  The  first  of  these  is  easily 
managed;  the  chief  thing  to  bear  in  mind  is,  that  the  first  of 
him  will  be  the  best,  and  that  the  sooner  you  take  him  the 
better.  As  he  gets  to  know  you — familiarity  breeds  contempt 
— he  will  become  less  manageable.  He  will  continue  to  smile 
and  be  very  good  and  agreeable,  but  you  will  find  that  after  a 
few  exposures  he  will  quietly  slip  off  the  chair,  or  run  away 
from  where  you  have  placed  him  when  you  turn  to  go  to  the 
camera.  He  approves  of  you,  and  wants  to  have  a  lark  with 


90 


THE    STUDIO. 


mathematics.  Probably  the  mother  is  in  the  room;  now 
mothers  are  a  very  useful  institution,  but  they  are  terribly  in 
the  way  when  their  children  are  to  be  photographed.  Turn  her 
out  with  all  the  civility  you  can  command.  You  must  then  ask 
the  nurse  to  do  everything  you  direct  intelligently  and  quickly, 
but  on  no  account  to  help  when  not  asked,  as  she  may  be  doing 
something  exactly  opposite  to  what  you  required.  The  ground 
will  now  be  cleared  for  dealing  with  your  sitter ;  the  time  he 
has  had  to  himself  will  have  probably  altered  his  convictions, 
and  he  will  submit ;  if  not,  shake  hands  with  him,  and  wish 
him  good-bye,  as  you  only  want  good  children  to  play  with.  If 
this  and  other  blandishments  do  not  fetch  him,  let  him  go. 
The  visit  has  done  him  no  harm,  and  he  will  remember  things 
that  he  would  like  to  see  again,  and  on  a  second  visit  will  pro- 
bably sit  without  any  trouble. 

It  would  be  tedious  to  consider  separately  every  variation  in 
the  characters  of  children,  but  if  the  photographer  would  suc- 
ceed with  these  delightful  little  troubles,  he  must  have  great 
patience,  a  genuine  delight  in  a  difficult  subject,  and  a  strong 
^determination  to  succeed  with  it.     AJbove  all,  he  must  establish 
\  perfect  confidence  between  himself  and  his  sitter,  to  do  which 
\he  must  descend  to  the  level  of  the  child,  and,  remembering 
pat  little  things  please  little  minds,  be  able  to  enter  into  child- 
jish  games,  tell  childish  tales,  and,  above  all,  to  play  with  toys ! 
Before  concluding  this  subject,  I  must  say  a  word  or  two  on 
expression.     The  most  beautiful  thing  about  the  most  beautiful 
child  is  nearly  always  its  expression.     This  can  only  be  educed 
by  stratagem,  and  should  demand  the  greatest  efforts  of  the 
photographer.     A  simple  pose,  such  as  sitting  on  a  table  (which, 
for  a  three-quarter  vignette,  is  a  very  suitable  position),  will 
suit  a  child  better  than  any  elaborate  arrangement,  so  that  your 
attention  shall  not  be  unduly  distracted  from  the  bringing  out 
of  the  best  expression. 

You  will,  of  course,  have  a  whole  battery  of  toys  ready  when 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE    SITTER.  91 


required  to  amuse  your  little  sitters,  for  toys  are  the  stock-in- 
trade  of  childhood,  and  he  who  understands  their  use  and 
mystery  best  will  soonest  become  at  one  with  his  subject.  I 
should  strongly  recommend  you  to  keep  them  strictly  for  your 
own  use.  If  the  child  sees  they  belong  to  you,  and  can  only  be 
got  through  you,  you  will  become  a  much  more  interesting  per-  ( 
son  to  him,  and  consequently  have  more  power.  If  you  allow 
the  nurse  to  have  the  run  of  the  collection,  she  will  show  them 
all  at  once,  or  quickly  one  after  the  other,  and  their  power  for 
use  will  be  gone.  Some  toys  are  more  adapted  to  keep  children 
quiet,  or  awaken  their  expression,  than  others — those  to  which  _. 
they  have  to  listen,  for  instance.  The  ticking  of  a  watch  is  the 
most  familiar  of  these,  but  it  must  be  a  loud-ticking  one,  or  the 
effort  to  hear  will  put  too  much  strain  into  the  expression.  A 
musical  box  is  good,  but  rather  too  elaborate ;  any  toy  that  is 
new  to  the  child  is  good,  but  those  that  have  something  comic  ^ 
about  them,  and  make  a  noise,  are  best.  I  have  found  some  of 
the  india-rubber  toys  that  squeak  when  pressed  very  effective. 

There  are  some  children  who  will  sit  as  you  place  them  with- 
out any  trouble ;  but  when  you  are  thinking  what  an  easy  job 
you  have  got,  and  put  your  hand  on  the  cap  of  the  lens,  you 
find  them  making  faces.  This  generally  takes  the  form  of  an 
awe-struck  opening  of  the  mouth.  This  is  a  case  difficult  to 
treat.  You  will  not  be  so  unwise  as  to  tell  it  to  close  its  lips, 
for  to  mention  any  feature  to  a  child  is  to  make  it  think  of  that 
feature,  and  proceed  to  contort  it  at  once.  Perhaps  if  you  have 
not  warned  her,  the  injudicious  nurse  tells  it  to  shut  its  mouth, 
and  the  good,  obedient  little  thing  will  at  once  close  it  so  firmly 
that  there  is  nothing  more  to  be  done  until  the  child  has  for- 
gotten it.  I  have  found  that  the  best  way  to  deal  with  a  case 
of  this  kind  is  simply  to  touch  the  child  on  the  lower  lip,  and 
the  mouth  will  assume  its  natural  position. 

I  have  made  this  chapter  on  posing  children  already  too  long 
without  saying  anything  about  posing  them,  making  it  something. 


90  THE    STUDIO. 


mathematics.  Probably  the  mother  is  in  the  room;  now 
mothers  are  a  very  useful  institution,  but  they  are  terribly  in 
the  way  when  their  children  are  to  be  photographed.  Turn  her 
out  with  all  the  civility  you  can  command.  You  must  then  ask 
the  nurse  to  do  everything  you  direct  intelligently  and  quickly, 
but  on  no  account  to  help  when  not  asked,  as  she  may  be  doing 
something  exactly  opposite  to  what  you  required.  The  ground 
will  now  be  cleared  for  dealing  with  your  sitter ;  the  time  he 
has  had  to  himself  will  have  probably  altered  his  convictions, 
and  he  will  submit ;  if  not,  shake  hands  with  him,  and  wish 
him  good-bye,  as  you  only  want  good  children  to  play  with.  If 
this  and  other  blandishments  do  not  fetch  him,  let  him  go. 
The  visit  has  done  him  no  harm,  and  he  will  remember  things 
that  he  would  like  to  see  again,  and  on  a  second  visit  will  pro- 
bably sit  without  any  trouble. 

It  would  be  tedious  to  consider  separately  every  variation  in 
the  characters  of  children,  but  if  the  photographer  would  suc- 
ceed with  these  delightful  little  troubles,  he  must  have  great 
patience,  a  genuine  delight  in  a  difficult  subject,  and  a  strong 
^determination  to  succeed  with  it.  AJbove  all,  he  must  establish 
\  perfect  confidence  between  himself  and  his  sitter,  to  do  which 
he  must  descend  to  the  level  of  the  child,  and,  remembering 
pat  little  things  please  little  minds,  be  able  to  enter  into  child- 
Jish  games,  tell  childish  tales,  and,  above  all,  to  play  with  toys ! 
Before  concluding  this  subject,  I  must  say  a  word  or  two  on 
expression.  The  most  beautiful  thing  about  the  most  beautiful 
child  is  nearly  always  its  expression.  This  can  only  be  educed 
by  stratagem,  and  should  demand  the  greatest  efforts  of  the 
photographer.  A  simple  pose,  such  as  sitting  on  a  table  (which, 
for  a  three-quarter  vignette,  is  a  very  suitable  position),  will 
suit  a  child  better  than  any  elaborate  arrangement,  so  that  your 
attention  shall  not  be  unduly  distracted  from  the  bringing  out 
of  the  best  expression. 

You  will,  of  course,  have  a  whole  battery  of  toys  ready  when 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE    SITTER.  91 


required  to  amuse  your  little  sitters,  for  toys  are  the  stock-in- 
trade  of  childhood,  and  he  who  understands  their  use  and 
mystery  best  will  soonest  become  at  one  with  his  subject.  I 
should  strongly  recommend  you  to  keep  them  strictly  for  your 
own  use.  If  the  child  sees  they  belong  to  you,  and  can  only  be 
got  through  you,  you  will  become  a  much  more  interesting  per- 
son  to  him,  and  consequently  have  more  power.  If  you  allow 
the  nurse  to  have  the  run  of  the  collection,  she  will  show  them 
all  at  once,  or  quickly  one  after  the  other,  and  their  power  for 
use  will  be  gone.  Some  toys  are  more  adapted  to  keep  children 
quiet,  or  awaken  their  expression,  than  others — those  to  which 
they  have  to  listen,  for  instance.  The  ticking  of  a  watch  is  the 
most  familiar  of  these,  but  it  must  be  a  loud-ticking  one,  or  the 
effort  to  hear  will  put  too  much  strain  into  the  expression.  A 
musical  box  is  good,  but  rather  too  elaborate ;  any  toy  that  is 
new  to  the  child  is  good,  but  those  that  have  something  comic 
about  them,  and  make  a  noise,  are  best.  I  have  found  some  of 
the  india-rubber  toys  that  squeak  when  pressed  very  effective. 

There  are  some  children  who  will  sit  as  you  place  them  with- 
out any  trouble ;  but  when  you  are  thinking  what  an  easy  job 
you  have  got,  and  put  your  hand  on  the  cap  of  the  lens,  you 
find  them  making  faces.  This  generally  takes  the  form  of  an 
awe-struck  opening  of  the  mouth.  This  is  a  case  difficult  to 
treat.  You  will  not  be  so  unwise  as  to  tell  it  to  close  its  lips, 
for  to  mention  any  feature  to  a  child  is  to  make  it  think  of  that 
feature,  and  proceed  to  contort  it  at  once.  Perhaps  if  you  have 
not  warned  her,  the  injudicious  nurse  tells  it  to  shut  its  mouth, 
and  the  good,  obedient  little  thing  will  at  once  close  it  so  firmly 
that  there  is  nothing  more  to  be  done  until  the  child  has  for- 
gotten it.  I  have  found  that  the  best  way  to  deal  with  a  case 
of  this  kind  is  simply  to  touch  the  child  on  the  lower  lip,  and 
the  mouth  will  assume  its  natural  position. 

I  have  made  this  chapter  on  posing  children  already  too  long 
without  saying  anything  about  posing  them,  making  it  something. 


92  THE    STUDIO. 


like  Artemus  Ward's  lecture  on  Africa,  in  which  the  subject 
was  not  referred  to  except  in  the  advertisements.  The  fact  is, 

» there  can  be  very  little  posing  of  a  young  child ;  you  must  do, 
not  what  you  would,  but  what  the  child  will  allow.  There  is 
one  thing  open  to  you — you  may  so  arrange  your  furniture  and 
accessories  that  the  child  shall  ultimately  take  a  good  pose.  I 
have  already  spoken  of  placing  it  on  a  table ;  this,  with  a  rug 
and  blocks  of  wood,  will  afford  plenty  of  variety,  and  for  older 
children  a  movable  platform  may  be  provided,  with  perhaps  a 
few  rocks,  for  it  does  not  do  to  look  down  too  much  on  your 

subject — and  working  at  a  low  camera  is  not  conducive  to 
comfort. 


CHAPTER  XIY. 

POSING   AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER, 
EXPRESSION   IN   PORTRAITURE. 

"  ETEEY  man  is  as  God  made  him,  and  oftentimes  a  great  deal 
worse,"  said  Sancho  Panza;  and,  if  we  may  judge  by  the 
productions  of  the  majority  of  photographers,  his  opinion  is- 
singularly  true.  Let  us  not  blind  ourselves  to  the  fact  that 
ordinary  photographs  are  very  ordinary  indeed.  The  dead  level 
of  good  work  has  spread  like  a  disease,  and  he  is  a  very  poor 
photographer  who  cannot  take  a  passably  good  portrait — one 
that,  seen  by  itself,  would  pass  muster  as  real  gold  with  the 
average  unobservant  person,  but  which  would  turn  out  mere 
tinsel  when  placed  side  by  side  with  the  work  of  a  master.  It 
would  be  difficult  to  at  once  tell  what  was  the  difference.  An 
old  friend  of  mine  used  to  say  that  it  was  "  That !  "  accompany- 
ing the  word  with  a  snap  of  the  fingers,  by  which  he  meant  to 
express  that  last  touch  by  which  genius  carries  its  work  just 
beyond  the  goal  reached  by  mere  talent — a  mystery  which  it  is- 
impossible  to  explain,  but  which  is  felt  in  all  art.  Inj  photo- 
graphic portraiture  it  will  be  found  to  depend  almost  entirely  on 
the  expression  of  the  face,  aided  by  the  attitude  of  the  figure, 
which  should  be  in  keeping  with  the  expression,  and  be  easy 
and  characteristic.  To  obtain  the  best  expression,  the  photo- 
grapher should  be  not  only  an  art  student,  but  a  student  of 


94  THE    STUDIO. 


Tiuman  nature.  He  should  not  only  be  able  to  pose  his  model  in 
a  graceful  or  appropriate  position,  to  place  him  in  an  effective 
light,  and  to  get  a  good  technical  negative  of  him,  but,  if  he  is 
to  be  the  ideal  photographer, 

"  That  perfect  monster  which  the  world  ne'er  saw," 

he  must  be  able  to  sum  up  his  sitter  at  a  first  introduction,  and 
determine  at  once,  amongst  other  things,  the  expression  which 
would  best  suit  that  face,  and  to  work  up  to  that  expression 
*  during  the  usually  brief  interval  which  elapses  between  intro- 
duction and  exposure. 

Have  you  ever  noticed,  when  you  are  about  to  take  a  portrait, 
and  are  endeavouring  to  call  up  an  animated  expression  on  the 
countenance  of  your  sitter,  what  a  dogged  determination  he 
sometimes  has,  not  to  be  beguiled  out  of  the  moody  expression 
he  has  assumed  ?  At  last,  when  you  have  tried  all  the  subtleties 
you  know,  you  ask  him,  in  desperation,  if  he  has  not  got  such  a 
trifle  as  a  smile  with  him.  He  immediately  answers,  with  a 
charming  expression  you  long  to  secure,  "  Oh,  no  !  when  I  smile 
in  a  photograph  I  always  grin."  Here  is  another  sample  of  a 
good  model  gone  wrong  through  the  stupidity  of  photographers. 
Many  operators  think  that  if  they  make  their  sitters  smile — 
they  don't  care  about  the  quality  of  the  smile — they  have  done 
their  duty  in  their  own  particular  state  of  life,  forgetting  that 
many  people  look  idiotic  when  their  simpers  and  smiles  are 
perpetuated.  Others  seem  to  think  that  all  expression  consists 
of  gush,  and  wake  up  the  features  to  an  unnatural  degree  of 
intensity.  The  photographer  should  endeavour  to  represent  his 
>  sitters  as  moderately  calm  ladies  and  gentlemen  ;  or,  if  they  are 
not  entitled  to  the  courtesy  title,  then  as  decent  men  and  women. 

Some  faces  are  beautiful  in  repose,  hideous  in  movement.  A 
broad  laugh  is  often  beautiful  in  nature,  because  of  its  evanes- 
cence ;  it  becomes  intolerable  when  fixed  on  paper.  But  there 
is  a  look  of  animation,  far  short  of  a  smile,  which  suits  nearly 


MANAGEMENT    OF    THE    SITTER.  95 


all  faces,  and  which  is  so  permanently  beautiful  that  it  deserves 
to  be  printed  in  carbon  or  enamel. 

John  Gibson,  the  famous  sculptor,  considered  a  smile  frivolous ; 
but  what  would  be  undignified  in  sculpture  may  be  proper  to 
less  severe  modes  of  artistic  expression.  He  says,  in  a  letter  to 
a  friend: — "The  fault  of  the  portraits  of  the  present  age  is, 
that  every  man  is  expected  to  look  pleasant  in  his  pictures. 
The  old  masters  represent  men  thinking,  and  women  tranquil ; 
the  Greeks  the  same.  Therefore,  the  past  race  of  portraits  in 
paint  and  in  marble  look  more  like  a  superior  class  of  beings. 
How  often  have  I  heard  the  remark,  *  Oh !  he  looks  too  serious.' 
But  the  expression  that  is  meant  to  be  permanent  should  be 
serious  and  calm." 

This  is  true  enough  of  the  expressions  of  men,  but  I  cannot 
help  feeling  that  the  cheerful  expressions  of  ladies  and  children 
are  their  best,  especially  when  they  are  educed  with  such  art  as 
to  appear  perfectly  natural ;  indeed,  some  of  the  most  delightful  •< 
portraits  of  children  represent  them  in  a  very  happy  frame  of 
mind. 

The  quality  necessary  in  a  man  to  enable  him  to  draw  out  the 
best  expression  is  "  a  gift."  It  may  be  improved  by  education 
and  practice,  but  it  is  not  to  be  attained  by  those  who  have  it 
not  in  their  natures.  The  latter  may  do  high-class  work,  but 
never  that  which  electrifies.  A  fine  work  should  always  give 
that  feeling  of  pleased  surprise  which  sends  a  glow  of  pleasure 
through  the  frame.  This  is  never  obtained  through  the  inter- 
vention of  that  photographer  who  has  not  the  proper  "music  in 
his  soul." 

When  a  man  goes  to  have  his  portrait  taken,  his  mind  will, 
consciously  or  unconsciously,  dwell  upon  the  ordeal  he  is  to  go 
through ;  he  will  think  of  how  his  coat  fits,  how  he  [feels,  and 
how  he  will  look  ;  it  should  be  the  business  of  the  photographer  ^ 
to  make  him  forget  all  this — and  himself.  The  man's  appearance 
is  positively  deteriorated  by  constant  reference  to  self,  and  the 


9fi  THE   STUDIO. 


consideration  of  how  he  looks  when  sitting  for  a  portrait.  Now 
what  that  phase  conveys  is  exactly  that  which  should  be  avoided. 
It  is  needless  to  tell  photographers  that  one-half  their  sitters 
think  they  know  how  to  sit,  and  it  is  equally  unnecessary  to  add 
that  this  knowing  moiety  are  his  worst  subjects. 

The  kind  of  conversational  treatment  that  would  best  suit 
every  sitter  must  be  left  for  each  photographer  to  decide  for 
himself. 

Everything  so  much  depends  on  small  things  that  it  would  be 
difficult  to  say  much  about  them  without  opening  a  wider  subject 
than  is  here  intended ;  but  the  photographer  would  find  that  it 
would  simplify  his  labour,  and  be  a  kind  of  aid  to  thought,  if  he 
made  a  rough  classification  of  his  sitters,  such  as  those  who  are 
best  left  alone.  These  are  those  who  are  ordered  to  have  their 
portraits  taken  by  their  friends,  and  do  not  care  how  it  is  done ; 
they  usually  obey  the  photographer's  directions  without  question, 
and  their  portraits  are  always  natural.  The  nervous,  who  require 
very  delicate  treatment ;  those  whom  a  bluff  treatment  would 
suit,  and  those  who  claim  the  greatest  show  of  respect ;  and, 
above  all,  those  who  "  hate  being  photographed."  These  last- 
mentioned  are  the  sort  I  like  if  I  have  time  to  deal  with  them 
properly.  It  makes  one  feel  a  professional  pride  to  so  work 
these  difficult  sitters  that  they  shall  feel  that  although  they 
came  to  you  with  reluctance,  they  leave  with  regret.  This,  I 
find,  is  often  the  case  with  children.  They  will  sometimes 
scream  at  being  brought,  and  scream  at  being  taken  away.  Then 
there  is  that  much  respected  person  who  thinks  he  can  teach  you 
your  business — the  best  way  is  to  listen  and  learn.  No  man 
can  speak  without  saying  something. 

A  great  deal  of  expression,  and  that  of  the  most  agreeable 
kind,  may  be  produced  by  the  action  of  the  figure,  as  well  as  by 
the  feature.  Appropriate  action  may  give  life  and  animation  to 
a  subject  not  otherwise  attainable.  A  man  would  not  look  very 
happy  if  he  held  down  his  head,  and  tucked  in  his  chin,  smiled 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE    SITTER.  97 

he  never  so  pleasantly;  while  a  very  little  animation  in  the 
features  will  have  an  agreeable  effect  if  it  is  properly  backed  up 
and  assisted  by  an  animated  turn  of  the  head ;  but,  at  the  same 
time,  straining  after  expression  must  be  avoided ;  the  happy 
mean  is  what  the  judicious  photographer  should  strive  for  and 
get. 

Some  photographers  seem  to  do  all  they  know  to  awe  their 
sitters  into  their  worst  expressions.  A  lady  who  was  recently 
sitting  to  me  told  me  her  experiences  in  getting  her  portrait 
taken  in  a  well-known  studio  in  London.  An  appointment  was 
made  beforehand.  The  door  was  opened  by  a  man-servant  in  a 
gaudy  livery.  The  lady  was  ushered  upstairs,  and  kept  waiting 
for  half-an-hour,  with  nothing  to  amuse  her  but  the  solemn 
grandeur  of  the  place.  In  the  studio  there  were  three  photo- 
graphers to  attend  to  her ;  one  to  work  the  camera,  another  to 
move  the  furniture  and  place  the  head-rest,  and  a  third  in  white 
kid  gloves  to  take  command  of  the  posing.  The  two  latter 
talked  over  the  personal  appearance  of  the  sitter  as  if  she  was  an 
unintelligent  lay  figure,  which  she  says  she  felt  she  had  become 
before  the  exposure  commenced,  and  she  looks  like  it  in  the 
print. 

I  cannot  understand  how  it  is  possible  to  make  the  sitter  feel 
at  his  ease  if  the  operator  has  a  lot  of  assistants  to  help  him. 
Sitting  for  a  portrait  should  be  a  matter  for  friendly  intimacy 
between  sitter  and  photographer,  not  a  solemn  ceremony. 

Those  who  still  look  at  photography  with  withering  contempt 
— and  some  such  exist  to  the  present  day,  just  as  it  is  thought 
that  rare  individuals  of  the  plesiosaurus  are  yet  to  be  found  in  the 
deep  seas — complain  that  photography  has  no  power  to  idealise ; 
but  if  they  had  any  knowledge  of  our  mysteries,  they  would  know 
that  it  is  no  longer  the  truthful  art  it  was  when  it  was  famous 
for  having  no  mercy. 

These  critics  take  it  as  a  foregone  conclusion  that  a  portrait 
should  be  idealised.  The  notion  that  the  artist  should  invest 


98  THE    STUDIO. 


his  sitters  with  a  grace  not  their  own  seems  never  to  have  been 
doubted.  Dr.  Johnson  said  that  it  was  one  of  the  highest  proofs 
of  the  genius  of  Eeynolds  that  he  contrived  to  give  nobleness  to 
the  head  of  Goldsmith  in  his  portrait,  whose  genial  soul  and 
fine  intellect  were  not  habited  in  a  very  dignified  or  handsome 
body.  If  Eeynolds  gave  to  Goldsmith  a  nobility  of  countenance 
which  nature  had  denied,  but  which  the  painter  conceived  was 
more  characteristic  of  the  inner  man  than  the  actual  present- 
ment, then  we  have  in  the  portrait  Eeynolds'  conception  of 
what  Goldsmith  ought  to  have  looked  like,  and  not  the  actual 
portrait  of  the  man.  If  he  merely  depicted  him  at  his  best, 
happily  catching  the  expression  which  lit  up  the  face  when  it 
was  aglow  with  some  happy  thought,  then  he  did  not  give 
Goldsmith  the  noble  look,  but,  with  the  true  painter's  skill, 
readily  detected  the  noblest  effect,  and  gave  permanent  form  to 
a  transient  expression ;  he  did  what  every  photographer  should 
try  to  do,  and  when  he  succeeds  he  may  expect  to  hear  the 
sitter's  friends  exclaim — 

"  Masterly  done  : 

The  very  life  seems  warm  upon  the  lips  ; 
The  fixture  of  the  eye  has  motion  in  it, 
And  we  are  mocked  by  art." 

"  <P'V 


CHAPTER  XV. 

POSING  AND  THE  MANAGEMENT  OF  THE  SITTER. 
SUGGESTION  AND  INTERFERENCE  IN  POSING. 

THE  photographer  is  often  annoyed  by  the  ridiculous  suggestions 
made  by  the  friends  of  the  sitter,  and  sometimes  by  the  sitter 
himself,  although  the  latter  oftener  takes  the  character  of  a 
hopeless  victim. 

It  is  a  question  how  far  such  interference  is  to  be  tolerated, 
and  how  it  is  to  be  met. 

Many  photographers  object  to  their  sitters  being  accompanied 
by  a  friend,  and  prefer  to  have  them  to  themselves.  I  do  not 
agree  with  this  exclusion,  and  always  welcome  the  presence  of 
one  or  two  of  the  sitter's  friends,  if  they  are  not  fussy  people, 
and  gladly  accept  their  hints  and  suggestions  if  they  are  made 
at  the  proper  time — that  is,  before  I  begin  to  pose  the  model ; 
any  interference  after  I  have  begun  is  sure  to  do  mischief. 
Everything  depends  upon  the  temperament  of  the  sitter.  She 
— it  is  the  ladies  generally  who  object  to  come  alone — may  like 
to  have  a  friend  with  her  to  give  her  confidence,  but  prefers  not 
to  be  looked  at  as  the  exposure  is  going  on.  It  is  always  easy 
to  manage  in  a  case  of  this  sort.  The  friend  may  turn  away 
her  head,  or  sit  behind  a  curtain ;  in  my  own  place  I  have  a  sort 
of  ante-room  to  the  studio,  made  attractive  and  comfortable, 
into  which  I  send  the  friends  when  I  find  they  are  doing  mis- 


100  THE   STUDIO. 


chief  by  remaining  in  the  studio.  This  is  sufficiently  near  to 
satisfy  the  most  nervous  sitter,  and  they  do  not  interfere  with 
the  operation.  It  is  the  practice  of  some  photographers  not  to 
permit  anyone  to  be  present,  but  it  is  not  wise  to  draw  a  hard- 
and-fast  line.  It  should  be  absolutely  at  the  sitter's  choice 
whether  friends  should  be  present  or  not ;  it  is  surely  better  to 
humour  the  sitter  and  get  a  good  portrait,  than  to  have  your 
own  way  entirely  and  an  inferior  production.  When  the 
friends  have  left  the  studio  they  should  remain  away  until 
the  exposure  has  taken  place.  Nothing  is  more  disturbing 
than  people  going  in  and  out.  Above  all,  never  allow  peeping. 
Friends  will  sometimes  go  away,  and  then  creep  quietly  back 
and  peep  through  the  door  or  through  a  curtain.  Nothing 
could  be  more  calculated  to  make  the  sitter  nervous  than  this 
sort  of  thing,  and  it  quite  prevents  all  endeavours  to  try  what 
might  be  called  experimental  expression.  Sitters  are  often  in- 
clined to  think  they  lose  dignity  if  they  do  not  look  dignified. 
It  is  often  possible  to  talk  them  into  a  genial  state,  or  get  them 
to  act  the  part — "  assume  a  virtue  if  they  have  it  not" — but 
this  is  quite  out  of  the  question  if  you  or  the  sitter  feels  all  the 
time  that  there  is  some  one  taking  a  surreptitious  peep,  and 
listening  to  all  that  is  said. 

Having  made  it  clear  that  I  do  not  object  to  two  or  three  of 
the  friends  of  the  sitter  being  present,  let  us  see  how  far  these 
visitors  may  be  allowed  to  interfere. 

Information  is  always  valuable,  and  any  information  a  photo- 
grapher can  get  he  should  be  thankful  for,  and  use  at  his  dis- 
cretion. Of  course,  the  size  and  style  of  the  picture  required 
has  been  settled  in  the  reception  room ;  but  it  is  often  of  great 
advantage  to  get  some  further  knowledge  than  can  be  obtained 
at  first  sight  of  your  subject.  It  is  well  to  know  if  former 
photographers  have  failed,  and  why.  Was  it  expression,  pose, 
dress,  bad  photography,  or  what?  Useful  hints  of  what  to  avoid 
can  easily  be  gathered,  and  you  may  learn  what  is  best  to  be 


MANAGEMENT    OF   THE    SITTKH.  101 

done  by  judicious  conversation ;  you  should  also  find  out  the 
sort  of  thing  that  would  be  likely  to  please,  such  as  any 
characteristic  attitude  or  expression.  All  this  will  aid  you  in 
getting  a  picture  that  the  friends  will  declare  is  "  so  like."  I 
need  not  say  that  you  should  find  out  whether  a  sitting  or 
standing  pose  would  be  preferred.  It  often  happens  that  after 
the  operator  has  taken  the  number  of  negatives  he  thinks 
necessary  or  desirable  to  use  in  the  particular  case,  and  the  job 
is,  in  fact,  finished,  some  kind  friend  will  suggest  that  she  should 
so  like  to  have  "  one  in  a  hat."  This  you  would  have  been  very 
glad  to  do  if  you  had  known  in  time,  but  it  is  difficult  to  refuse, 
and  you  expose  another  plate.  This  might  have  been  avoided  if 
proper  enquiries  had  been  made  at  the  outset. 

Then  there  are  those  who  want  to  see  the  pose,  and  will 
promise  to  go  away  when  you  are  ready.  These  people  are  not 
easy  to  deal  with.  It  is  difficult  to  explain  to  them  before  the 
sitter  that  you  may  possibly  want  to  surprise  her  into  a 
characteristic  attitude  or  expression ;  that  would  be  to  expose 
your  carefully  masked  plot,  and  moreover,  if  you  do  let  them 
stay,  they  will,  perhaps,  not  go  at  the  last  minute,  and  the  sitter 
will  feel  constrained,  and  tire  while  you  are  getting  them  out. 
My  rule  is,  in  or  out,  just  as  the  sitter  pleases,  but  not  in  and 
out  on  any  pretext. 

There  are  some  people  who  are  quite  irrepressible.  They 
promise  not  to  interfere,  and  mean  to  keep  their  promise,  but 
for  all  that  jump  up  just  as  the  cap  is  about  to  be  removed  from 
the  lens  to  alter  a  bit  of  drapery  or  set  a  lock  of  hair  straight, 
or  to  make  a  brilliant  suggestion,  such  as  that  the  pose  of  the 
hands  might  be  improved — when  you  are  taking  the  head  only ! 
They  knew  very  well  that  the  hands  would  not  be  in  the  picture, 
but  such  people  cannot  restrain  themselves,  and  should  be  got 
rid  of  if  possible.  When  these  vexing  little  incidents  occur,  it 
is  better  to  break  off,  make  the  sitter  walk  round  the  room,  and 
begin  again. 


102  THE  STUDIO. 


Some  sitters  will  bring  a  friend  to  pose  them.  ' '  It  is  such,  an 
advantage,  you  know,  to  have  the  assistance  of  an  artist,"  they 
will  perhaps  insult  you  by  saying,  on  the  strength  of  their  friend 
having  passed  the  second  grade  examination  in  free-hand,  or 
copied  some  smudgy  flowers  on  terra  cotta,  but  who,  neverthe- 
less, has  never  heard  of  composition.  Of  all  the  irritating 
assistance  the  photographer  has  offered  to  him,  that  of  the 
amateur  artist  is  the  most  difficult  to  accept  smiling — or,  perhaps, 
I  should  say,  without  smiling.  The  highly  trained  artist  is  bad 
enough,  as  I  shall  presently  show ;  but  the  combined  ignorance 
and  assurance  of  the  amateur  is  quite  fatal. 

Then  there  are  those  who  kindly  endeavour  to  teach  you  your 
business — who  explain  that  hands  come  large  if  placed  too  for- 
ward; that  blue  photographs  badly,  that  yellow  does  not 
"  take,"  and  that  photographs  taken  abroad  are  better  than  those 
done  in  this  country,  because  the  light  is  clearer ;  and,  finally, 
those  who  prefer  to  give  you  their  instructions  in  learned  words 
suited  to  the  occasion,  just  as  they  would  talk  to  a  foreigner  in 
his  own  tongue — and  puzzle  him.  These  wise  ones  want  their 
portrait  to  be  "a  small  focus,"  or  "  a  large  focus,"  and  are 
surprised  if  you  tell  them  that  there  are  no  different  sizes  of 
focus,  and  that  focus  has  no  other  dimension  than  length. 

How  much  help  you  are  to  admit  in  dealing  with  young  folks, 
I  have  alluded  to  incidentally  in  the  chapter  on  photographing 
children.  It  is  quite  impossible  to  get  on  if  children  are 
accompanied  by  a  troop  of  friends,  especially  lively  grandfathers 
and  grandmothers.  A  father  may  sometimes  be  admitted  if  he 
be  of  an  exceptional  sort,  but  even  in  his  case  it  is  better  to  keep 
him  in  reserve  for  use  if  the  usual  means  fail.  Nine  out  of  ten 
mothers  are  useful,  but  the  tenth  should  be  kept  out  of  the 
studio.  A  nurse  who  knows  her  business  is  the  best  help  you 
can  have.  Even  she  will  sometimes  want  a  standing  portrait  of 
a  ten-month  old  baby,  but  it  is  easier  to  tell  the  nurse  she  is  an 
idiot  than  the  mother. 


MANAGEMENT   OF   THE   SITTER.  103 

It  might  be  thought  that  artists,  and  those  who  have  been 
trained  to  art,  would  be  able  to  give  very  efficient  advice  in  the 
studio;  but  I  have  found  it  quite  to  the  contrary,  and  this 
invariably.  Even  experienced  portrait  painters  are  very  much 
at  a  loss  how  to  pose  a  sitter  for  the  photographer,  although  they 
may  require  the  photograph  for  their  own  use,  and  may  have 
had  time  to  consider  the  matter.  The  fact  is,  that  painters  are 
in  the  habit  of  going  about  their  work  in  a  more  leisurely  manner 
than  photographers,  and  cannot  pose  quickly.  They  find  it  to 
their  advantage  to  go  quietly  to  work,  as  they  can  call  up 
expression  when  they  want  it,  or  leave  it  to  a  future  sitting ; 
while  the  photographer  knows  that  if  he  harasses  his  sitter  too 
much,  he  knocks  the  life  out  of  him.  Yet  there  are  some  photo- 
graphers who  gladly  accept  the  aid  of  a  brother  artist  if  he  can 
prove  that  he  really  is  skilful  in  his  business. 

There  is  a  story  that  once  upon  a  time,  when  an  illustrious 
prince  and  his  noble  entertainer  returned  from  deer- stalking, 
they  sent  for  a  photographer  to  make  a  pictorial  record  of  their 
successful  day's  sport.  When  the  stags  were  being  arranged, 
Sir  Edwin  Landseer,  who  was  present,  made  some  suggestions 
for  the  improvement  of  the  composition  of  the  group.  The 
photographer  resented  this  interference,  declaring  that  he  could 
not  get  on  if  those  who  knew  nothing  about  art  altered  his 
arrangements.  "  But  I  am  Sir  Edwin  Landseer,"  said  the  great 
artist;  "  surely  you  know  my  pictures."  "  Oh  !  if  you  are  in 
the  trade  it  is  all  right,"  replied  the  photographer,  and  gladly 
accepted  Sir  Edwin's  assistance. 

To  conclude.  Be  strong,  but  hide  your  strength ;  be  gentle 
in  manner,  but  vigorous  in  the  deed  ;  make  up  your  mind  what 
you  mean  to  do,  and  do  it.  If  your  sitter  or  her  friends  think 
all  the  credit  is  due  to  themselves,  let  them  think  so.  It  pleases 
them,  and  does  not  hurt  you ;  in  fact,  it  is  in  your  favour,  for 
they  will  like  the  picture  all  the  better  if  they  fancy  its  merits 
are  due  to  their  own  valuable  suggestions. 


CHAPTER  XVI, 

SMILES    AND    SMILING. 

A  EEALLT  beautiful  smile,  natural,  and  without  the  taint  of 
artifice,  is  one  of  the  rarest,  as  well  as  the  most  delightful, 
inventions  of  nature.  The  tendency  in  the  zygomatic  muscles 
to  contract  under  pleasurable  emotions,  to  speak  scientifically, 
is  a  joy  reserved  for  mankind  alone,  for  the  hyaena  does  not 
laugh,  whatever  unscientific  natural  historians  may  say  to  the 
contrary.  Not  that  I  should  like  to  assert  too  positively  that 
all  animals  have  not  some  equivalent  method  for  displaying  their 
•emotions,  for  surely  many  of  them  show  rudimentary  attempts 
at  expression  in  their  faces. 

Some  dogs,  for  instance,  can  convey  an  easily-interpreted 
expression  of  their  feelings  by  their  looks.  The  other  morning 
I  asked  a  friendly  terrier,  belonging  to  a  neighbour,  to  &o  for 
a  walk.  There  was  a  most  distinct  look  of  pleasure  on  that 
dog's  face  as  he  frisked  around  when  he  accepted  the  invitation, 
and  I  fancied  I  could  detect  an  upward  curl  of  the  mouth; 
there  was  certainly  a  twinkle  in  the  eye.  It  happened  that 
after  I  had  walked  a  mile  from  home,  I  went  into  a  shop, 
leaving  the  dog  to  wait  outside.  I  stayed  longer  than  I 
intended,  and  left  by  a  different  door  to  the  one  by  which  I 
entered,  forgetting  my  canine  friend.  Since  that  time  I  have 
never  been  able  to  induce  that  dog  to  take  any  notice  of  me, 


SMILES   AND    SMILING.  105 

except  to  put  on  a  dejected,  disgusted  visage  whenever  I 
approach.  His  feelings  were  hurt,  and  he  did  not  care  to 
conceal  it. 

That  rudimentary  expressions  are  to  be  traced  in  animals, 
goes  to  prove  that  the  smile,  like  man  himself,  is  the  result  of 
evolution,  and  that  the  perfected  smile  is  the  product  of 
civilisation.  We  do  not  know  how  far  this  can  be  traced  back  ; 
all  we  do  know  is  that  an  oyster  can  be  crossed  in  love,  but  we 
cannot  definitely  ascertain  that  he  is  capable  of  smiling  at  grief, 
like  patience  on  a  monument. 

The  smile,  then,  being  a  product  of  civilisation,  is  capable  of 
being  overdone,  and  of  becoming  unnatural,  as,  indeed,  is  the 
tendency  of  all  cultivated  things ;  and  it  is  this  false  smile  that 
gives  the  conscientious  photographer  more  trouble  than  any 
other  phase  of  expression.  The  unconscious  smile,  that  perfect 
expression  of  happiness,  seems  to  be  dying  out.  It  is  rarely 
present  even  in  children,  especially  when  they  are  in  the  hands 
of  the  photographer,  however  sympathetic  he  may  be.  "Who 
amongst  us  does  not  constantly  observe  that  painful  nervous 
contraction  of  the  lips  and  elongation  of  mouth  seen  in  many 
children  when  they  are  being  photographed?  Parents  and 
nurses  are  a  good  deal  to  blame  for  this.  They  impress  on  the 
young  people,  before  they  take  them  to  the  studio,  that  they 
must  be  still,  and,  above  all,  must  look  pleasant.  Now  what  is 
the  effect  on  its  appearance  of  telling  a  child  to  be  good  ?  If  it 
is  of  a  kindly  disposition,  it  will  become  prim ;  if  the  demon 
that  seems  to  possess  some  children's  souls  has  possession  of  it, 
it  will  become  sullen.  Then,  being  dressed  specially  for  the 
occasion  has  its  effect.  It  is  impossible  for  a  child  used  to  the 
enjoyment,  in  easy-fitting  clothes,  of  the  rollicking  pleasures 
of  the  nursery,  to  appear  at  its  ease  in  its  "  Sunday  best,"  yet 
its  natural  guardians  not  only  overdress  the  child,  but  will 
sometimes  go  even  further,  and  try  on  unaccustomed  garments 
and  new  ways  of  doing  the  hair.  Now  to  dress  a  child  in  stiff 


106  THE    STUDIO. 


clothes,  different  from  its  ordinary  wear,  to  alter  the  style  of 
hair,  and  to  solemnly  impress  upon  the  poor  little  mite  that  it 
must  be  good  and  smile,  is  to  kill  that  child  as  a  subject  for  the 
photographer.  It  is  sometimes  possible  for  a  clever  operator  to 
make  a  modern  young  person  forget  all  the  world,  and  become 
"even  as  a  little  child"  again,  but  the  exertion  is  more  than 
some  photographers  are  equal  to.  So  the  natural  smile  is  dying 
out,  killed  through  the  folly  of  mothers  and  nurses  when  they 
prepare  their  children  for  being  photographed.  I  am  glad 
we  have  been  able  to  trace  this  growing  defect  of  nature  to  its 
origin ! 

Mothers  and  nurses  know  so  little  of  children!  They  are 
incredulous  when  told  that  infants  never  smile,  but  that  it  comes 
to  them  as  they  grow.  The  art  of  smiling  has  to  be  learnt  by 
experience,  and,  perhaps,  at  that  early  age,  infants  have  no 
happy  thoughts  to  smile  at — have  not  attained  the  power  to  see 
"those  undiscerned  phantasms  that  make  a  chrisom  child  to- 
smile."  Mr.  Darwin,  who  seems  to  have  gathered  up  all  facta 
in  nature,  describes  his  observations  on  this  point  in  a  character- 
istic passage : — "  It  is  well  known  to  those  who  have  the  charge 
of  young  infants,  that  it  is  difficult  to  feel  sure  when  certain 
movements  about  their  mouths  are  really  expressive;  that  is, 
when  they  really  smile.  Hence  I  carefully  watched  my  own 
infants.  One  of  them,  at  the  age  of  forty-five  days,  and  being 
at  the  time  in  a  happy  frame  of  mind,  smiled;  that  is,  the 
corners  of  the  mouth  were  retracted,  and  simultaneously  the  eyes 
became  decidedly  bright.  I  observed  the  same  thing  on  the 
following  day;  but  on  the  third  day  the  child  was  not  quite 
well,  and  there  was  no  trace  of  a  smile,  and  this  renders  it 
probable  that  the  previous  smiles  were  real.  Eight  days  subse- 
quently, and  during  the  next  succeeding  week,  it  was  remarkable 
how  his  eyes  brightened  whenever  he  smiled,  and  his  nose 
became  at  the  same  time  transversely  wrinkled.  This  was  now 
accompanied  by  a  little  bleating  noise,  which  perhaps  represented 


SMILES   AND    SMILING.  107 

a  laugh.  At  the  age  of  113  days,  these  little  noises,  which  were 
always  made  during  expiration,  assumed  a  slightly  different 
character,  and  were  more  broken  or  interrupted,  as  in  sobhing  • 
and  this  was  certainly  incipient  laughter." 

In  a  second  infant  the  first  real  smile  was  seen  at  about  the 
same  age,  and  in  a  third  somewhat  earlier.  In  this  gradual 
acquirement,  by  infants,  of  the  habit  of  laughing,  we  have  a 
case  analogous  to  other  uses  of  the  human  frame.  As  practice 
is  requisite  with  the  ordinary  movements  of  the  .body,  such  as 
walking,  so  it  seems  to  be  with  laughing ;  it  must  grow,  and  if 
in  its  growth  it  is  twisted  out  of  form,  it  will  never  be  a  graceful 
and  pleasant  expression  of  joyous  feeling. 

The  natural  smile  in  children  of  a  larger  growth  is  interfered 
with  by  another  cause.  Young  ladies  seem  to  think  that  the 
glory  of  a  woman  does  not  lie,  as  of  old  time,  in  her  long  hair, 
so  much  as  in  her  mouth.  Modern  ideas  of  beauty  insist  that 
the  mouth  must  be  small,  therefore  the  owners  of  them  must 
make  them  as  small  as  possible.  The  facial  efforts  made  to 
effect  this  purpose  are  prodigious.  The  lips  are  drawn  in,  and 
useless  attempts  are  made  to  contract  the  lateral  extension; 
while  the  desire  to  look  cheerful,  which  naturally  lengthens  the 
mouth,  fights  with  the  antagonistic  determination  to  keep  within 
limits,  and  the  result  is  an  hysterical  grin. 

In  a  true  smile  the  lips  are  parted  more  or  less  widely,  with 
the  corners  of  the  mouth  drawn  backwards,  as  well  as  a  little 
upwards,  causing  wrinkles  to  form  under  the  eyes,  and  the  eyes 
become  partially  closed.  As  a  gentle  smile  grows  into  a  strong 
one,  or  into  a  laugh,  the  upper  lip  is  drawn  up,  and  the  muscles 
under  the  eyes  contract,  the  wrinkles  under  the  lower  eyelids, 
and  those  beneath  the  eyes,  are  much  strengthened  and  increased, 
and  the  eyebrows  are  slightly  lowered.  Now,  all  these  natural 
effects  of  a  smile  are  quite  incompatible  with  large  eyes  and 
small  mouths. 

One  of  the  most  difficult  features  a  photographer  has  to 


108  THE   STUDIO. 


contend  with  is  that  form  of  mouth  which  has  permanently- 
parted  lips,  leaving  the  teeth  full  in  view.  This  is  an  effect 
that  seems  to  be  becoming  more  prevalent  in  this  country.  An 
inspection  of  a  large  collection  of  old  photographic  portraits  will 
show  that  it  did  not  exist  to  such  an  extent  even  twenty  years 
ago.  The  effect  is  usually  not  disagreeable  in  nature.  Momentary 
changes  of  expression  seem  to  qualify  the  defect,  if  defect  it  can 
be  called;  but  in  a  photograph,  when  the  form  is  permanent, 
and  has  not  the  aid  of  varied  movement,  the  effect  is  not 
agreeable,  and  gives  the  photographer  much  trouble,  and  taxes 
Ms  ingenuity  to  hide  it.  This  is  a  case  in  which  any  attempt 
at  smiling  is  best  avoided,  as  it  only  tends  to  make  matters 
worse. 


CHAPTEE  XVII. 

LIKENESS— FAMILIAR    AND    OCCULT. 

A  SATISFACTOBY  resemblance  to  the  original  is  a  primary  excel- 
lence in  a  portrait  of  any  kind,  taking  precedence,  indeed,  of 
all  other  qualities.  The  resemblance  which  is  thus  important  is 
that  which  is  sufficiently  familiar  and  striking  to  be  recognised 
by  the  least  analytic  of  observers,  and  which  does  not  require 
ingenuity  to  discover,  or  argument  to  enforce.  It  should  be  the 
kind  of  resemblance  which  a  child  would  recognise,  and  which 
must  depend  more  on  the  truthful  resemblance  of  the  whole 
than  on  the  perfection  of  any  individual  part. 

The  production  of  such  likenesses  is  not  so  common  in  photo- 
graphy as  it  ought  to  be ;  and  although  good  photography  is 
important  to  the  production  of  a  good  likeness,  it  depends  less 
on  technical  excellence  in  the  picture  than  on  the  exercise  of 
good  judgment  on  the  part  of  the  sitter.  It  is  dependent  also 
upon  other  matters  beyond  the  control  or  knowledge  of  the 
portraitist,  but  in  regard  to  which  he  should  exercise,  as  far 
as  possible,  a  watchful  supervision.  I  have  referred  in  another 
chapter,  and  now  refer  again,  to  the  circumstance  which  pro- 
fessional portraitists  know  so  well,  and  from  which  they  suffer 
so  much  annoyance,  such  as  the  entire  change  of  the  ordinary 


110  THE    STUDIO. 


costume  on  the  part  of  the  sitter  when  preparing  to  sit  for  a 
portrait.  How  often  a  lady  who  usually  wears  her  hair  plainly 
braided,  curls  it  especially  for  the  express  purpose  of  sitting  for 
her  portrait,  to  the  entire  destruction  of  anything  like  familiarity 
in  the  resemblance !  And  so  with  other  modifications  in  the 
general  costume.  The  portraitist  should  suggest,  wherever 
opportunity  serves,  the  importance  of  preserving  the  usual  and 
familiar  appearance  in  the  arrangement  of  dress,  &c.,  in  all 
cases  where  the  portrait  is  to  be  prized  as  a  likeness  of  the 
sitter,  rather  than  preserved  as  a  memento  of  some  special  effect 
of  costume. 

But  one  of  the  most  valuable  aids  to  familiarity  of  effect  in 
a  portrait  is  the  securing  of  characteristic  position — a  thing  nine 
times  out  of  ten  lost  in  the  arrangement  made  by  the  portraitist. 
The  sitter  is  placed  in  a  chair,  very  often  of  unusual  construc- 
tion— perhaps  low  in  the  seat,  possibly  straight-backed,  and 
mediaeval ;  he  is  then  arranged  so  as  to  bear  a  given  relation  to 
the  position  of  the  camera,  and  to  the  arrangement  of  the  light ; 
his  hands  are  placed  in  approved  form;  his  head  is  fixed  in  a 
rest;  he  is  directed  to  gaze  at  a  certain  spot,  and  he  is  then 
invited  to  look  pleasant,  and  sit  perfectly  still. 
"  Quiet  as  a  stone, 
Still  as  the  silence." 

He  becomes  at  once  conscious  of  the  vital  importance  of  the 
moment ;  if  he  is  doubtful  of  his  steadiness,  he  makes  a  special 
effort,  with  a  look  of  ferocious  agony,  to  sit  perfectly  still ;  if  he 
is  more  anxious  about  the  expression  than  about  his  steadiness, 
he  probably  puts  on  an  insufferable  smirk.  In  either  case  a 
portrait  with  nothing  of  familiar  likeness  is  the  result. 

The  shrewd  and  observant  portraitist  will  do  the  reverse  of 
all  this,  and  direct  his  sitter  to  take  his  seat,  and  will  then, 
observing  the  position  naturally  assumed  before  "  arrangement " 
has  commenced,  with  the  least  possible  disturbance  of  the  posi- 
tion, secure  the  general  disposal  of  the  figure,  and,  wherever  it 


LIKENESS — FAMILIAR    AND    OCCULT.  Ill 

is  possible,  produce  the  necessary  variety  by  moving  the  camera 
and  re-arranging  the  light  to  suit  the  sitter,  rather  than  arrange 
the  sitter  to  suit  the  position  of  the  camera  and  the  light.  The 
more  like  the  interior  of  an  ordinary  sitting  room  the  studio 
can  be  made,  the  more  comfortable  the  accessories,  and  the  less 
formal  and  exacting  the  arrangement  of  the  sitter,  the  more 
familiar  the  likeness  will  probably  be. 

There  is  another  important  consideration,  which  will  have 
weight  in  the  minds  of  many,  and  which  will  frequently  interfere 
with  the  familiarity  of  the  likeness.  If  the  question  be  asked, 
"  Is  it  of  more  importance  to  secure  a  good  photograph  and 
agreeable  picture,  or  to  secure  a  familiar  and  satisfactory  like- 
ness ?  "  many  will  answer  that  it  is  more  important  to  secure 
a  good  picture ;  that  if  the  photography  and  pictorial  arrange- 
ment be  good,  the  likeness  ought  to  be  satisfactory  ;  and  to  such 
an  extent  is  this  feeling  carried  by  some,  that  they  are  literally 
unable  to  perceive  or  acknowledge  that  the  likeness  is  bad,  if 
the  picture  be  good.  The  defect,  they  allege,  is  a  want  of  per- 
ception in  the  observer;  or  the  sitter's  face  is  one  which  "does 
not  make  a  striking  likeness."  In  any  case,  the  photography 
is  good  in  all  points,  and  there  is  nothing  pictorially  wrong,  and 
therefore  the  portrait  ought  to  be  good ;  and,  if  it  is  not,  the 
portraitist  cannot  be  to  blame,  they  fancy.  I  have  so  often 
insisted  on  the  importance  of  artistic  arrangement,  and  of  making 
portraits  pleasing  and  striking  pictures,  that  I  shall  not  be 
misunderstood,  I  hope,  if  I  say  that  in  some  instances  this  very 
desire  interferes  with  the  familiarity  of  the  likeness. 

Here  is  a  case  in  point  in  the  shape  of  a  series  of  portraits  of 
an  intimate  friend,  with  every  phase  of  whose  fine  and  striking 
countenance  I  am  familiar.  He  has  delighted  the  public, 
counting  his  readers  by  hundreds  of  thousands,  and  made  some 
fame  and  position  for  himself  as  a  novelist,  essayist,  poet,  &c. ; 
has  been  photographed  by  many  artists,  each  of  whom  has, 
doubtless,  striven  to  produce  an  effective  portrait  of  a  man  of 


112  THE   STUDIO. 


mark.  Here  are  cards  and  whole  plates  by  various  first-rate 
photographers,  and  of  these,  whilst  all  are  more  or  less  good 
pictures,  and  all  more  or  less  like,  there  are  but  two  which  are 
thoroughly  characteristic  and  satisfactory,  the  chief  fault  in 
most  of  them  being  too  much  striving  after  effect.  In  one  we 
have  a  profile  with  chin  thrown  up,  and  the  whole  effect  self- 
asserting  and  truculent ;  in  another  we  have  a  standing  figure, 
with  open  book  in  one  hand,  and  a  finger  of  the  other  hand  laid 
on  a  page,  reminding  you  of  Mr.  Chadband  holding  forth,  as 
delineated  in  "  Bleak  House  "  ;  and  so  on  with  others.  These 
effects  were  doubtless  present  before  the  camera  at  the  moment 
when  the  plate  was  impressed,  and  were  the  result  of  an  unskilful 
striving  after  striking  effect  in  the  pose  and  arrangement.  Many 
operators,  in  their  desire  to  avoid  producing  the  mere  maps  of 
the  face  which  have  been  so  often  charged  on  photography  as 
its  normal  product,  fall  into  this  opposite  extreme  of  inducing 
the  sitter  to  act  a  part ;  and  as  very  few  persons  are  good  actors7 
it  is  not  surprising  that  in  such  cases  the  portraits,  however 
excellent  as  pictures,  are  unfamiliar  as  likenesses.  Let  the 
portraitist  ever  bear  in  mind  that  the  less  importance  the  sitter 
attaches  to  the  vital  moment  of  exposure,  the  more  natural  will 
be  his  expression ;  the  fewer  injunctions  as  to  looking  pleasant, 
sitting  still,  keeping  his  eye  fixed,  &c.,  the  less  likely  he  will 
be  to  look  affected  and  simpering  on  the  one  hand,  or  nervous- 
and  anxious  on  the  other. 

Besides  the  advantages  of  a  quiet  and  natural  portrait  in 
giving  familiar  likeness,  it  often  possesses  another  advantage  in 
having  certain  occult  traits  of  likeness,  only  discoverable  under 
special  circumstances.  This  is  a  peculiarity  of  a  really  good 
and  natural  photographic  portrait,  which  to  the  psychologist 
and  physiognomist  is  an  interesting  study.  How  often,  in  a 
good  photographic  portrait,  a  family  likeness  to  a  relative  i& 
discovered  which  had  not  been  apparent  to  anyone  in  the 
original !  How  often,  in  the  photograph  of  a  child,  is  suddenly 


LIKENESS — FAMILIAR    AND    OCCULT.  113 

perceived  its  wondrous  likeness  to  a  dead  grandsire,  which  until 
that  moment  had  never  been  thought  of — 

"  As  sometimes  in  a  dead  man's  face, 
To  those  who  watch  it  more  and  more, 
A  likeness,  hardly  seen  before, 
Comes  out — to  some  one  of  his  race." 

It  is  generally  in  the  simple,  unconstrained,  familiar  likeness 
that  these  unfamiliar  or  occult  phases  of  resemblance  are  most 
present  as  well. 

Rej  lander  once  brought  this  matter  of  occult  likeness  to  a  very 
crucial  test.  At  a  country  house  where  he  was  visiting  there 
was  a  beautiful  little  girl ;  on  the  walls  of  the  dining  room  was 
the  portrait,  old  and  cracked,  of  an  ancestress,  painted  when  the 
lady  was  about  the  age  of  the  child.  Eej lander  dressed  and 
posed  the  child  like  the  ancestress,  and  photographed  her.  On 
the  negative  he  imitated  the  cracks  and  defects  of  the  old  picture ; 
he  then  made  a  negative  of  the  picture,  and  when  both  were 
printed,  it  was  difficult  to  say  which  was  the  ancestress  and 
which  the  descendant. 

Nathaniel  Hawthorne,  in  his  charming  romance,  "  The  House 
with  Seven  Gables,"  gives  another  striking  illustration  of  this 
presence  of  occult  likeness  in  photographs,  even  in  a  case  in 
which  the  familiar  or  obvious  likeness  is  wanting.  The  passage 
describing  this  is  quoted  here  for  the  benefit  of  those  who  mav 
not  remember  it.  A  photographer  is  speaking  : — 

"  '  There  is  a  wonderful  insight  in  Heaven's  broad  and  simple 
sunshine.  While  we  give  it  credit  only  for  depicting  the  merest 
surface,  it  actually  brings  out  the  secret  character  with  a  truth 
no  painter  would  ever  venture  upon,  even  could  he  detect  it. 
There  is  at  least  no  flattery  in  my  humble  line  of  art.  Now, 
here  is  a  likeness  which  I  have  taken  over  and  over  again,  and 
still  with  no  better  result.  Yet  the  original  wears,  to  common 
eyes,  a  very  different  expression.  It  would  gratify  me  to  have 
your  judgment  on  this  character.'  He  exhibited  a  Daguerreo- 


114  THE   STUDIO. 


type  miniature  in  a  morocco  case.     Phcebe  merely  glanced  at  it, 
and  gave  it  back. 

"  'I  know  the  face/  she  replied,  l for  its  stern  eye  has  been 
following  me  about  all  day.  It  is  my  Puritan  ancestor,  who 
hangs  yonder  in  the  parlour.  To  be  sure,  you  have  found  some 
way  of  copying  the  portrait  without  its  black  velvet  cap  and 
grey  beard,  and  have  given  him  a  modern  coat  and  satin  cravat 
instead  of  his  cloak  and  band.  I  don't  think  him  improved  by 
your  alterations.7 

'"You  would  have  seen  other  differences  had  you  looked  a 
little  longer,'  said  Holgrave,  laughing,  yet  apparently  much 
struck.  '  I  can  assure  you  that  this  is  a  modern  face,  and  one 
which  you  will  very  probably  meet.  Now,  the  remarkable 
point  is  that  the  original  wears,  to  the  world's  eye,  and,  for 
aught  I  know,  to  his  most  intimate  friends,  an  exceedingly 
pleasant  countenance,  indicative  of  benevolence,  openness  of 
heart,  seeming  good  humour,  and  other  praiseworthy  qualities 
of  that  cast.  The  sun,  as  you  see,  tells  quite  another  story,  and 
will  not  be  coaxed  out  of  it,  after  half  a  dozen  patient  attempts 
•on  my  part.  Here  we  have  the  man  sly,  subtle,  hard,  imperious ; 
withal,  cold  as  ice.  Look  at  that  eye.  Would  you  like  to  be  at 
its  mercy  ?  At  that  mouth.  Could  it  ever  smile  ?  And  yet  if 
you  could  only  see  the  benign  smile  of  the  original !  It  is  so 
much  the  more  unfortunate  as  he  is  a  public  character  of  some 
eminence,  and  the  likeness  was  intended  to  be  engraved.' 

"  '  Well,  I  don't  wish  to  see  it  any  more,'  observed  Phcebe, 
turning  away  her  eyes.  'It  is  certainly  very  like  the  old 
portrait.'" 

The  Daguerreotype  here  tells  the  truth.  The  smiling  descend- 
ant of  the  stern  old  Puritan  is  really  a  man  hard,  cruel,  and 
black  of  heart ;  and  these  qualities,  in  conjunction  with  the 
family  traits  of  a  race,  persistently  make  themselves  apparent  in 
the  picture  limned  by  the  sun,  even  though  imperceptible  to 
common  observers  of  the  original.  The  possession  of  these  subtle 


LIKENESS — FAMILIAR   AND    OCCULT.  115 

peculiarities  of  likeness  is  a  quality  of  much  importance  in 
historical  portraiture,  whether  the  history  be  that  of  individuals, 
of  families,  or  of  nations,  and  is  one  well  worth  noting  and  pre- 
serving. The  quality  can  only  belong  to  honest  untouched 
photographs,  free  alike  from  affectation  and  constraint;  the 
simple  rendering  of  a  face  with  a  natural  expression,  with  due 
attention  to  the  best  technical  appliances  of  lighting,  arrange- 
ment, exposure,  and  development. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 

RETOUCHING. 

I  SHALL  have  nothing  to  say  on  the  manipulative  details  of 
retouching.  Practical  information  on  the  subject  has  been  so 
often  given  in  the  journals  and  separate  publications,  that 
reiteration  would  be  wearisome,  as  well  as  out  of  place  here ; 
but  a  glance  at  the  history  and  progress  of  retouching  may  be 
both  interesting  and  instructive.  In  the  earliest  days  of  photo- 
graphic portraiture,  retouching  was  not  only  unknown,  but 
impossible.  The  exquisitely  delicate  surface  of  the  Daguerreo- 
type would  not  tolerate  for  a  moment  the  touch  of  mechanical 
amelioration  ;  except,  indeed,  so  far  as  the  process  of  tinting  or 
colouring  effected  that  end.  The  colours  were  applied  in  the 
form  of  an  impalpable  powder,  and  the  result  of  their  applica- 
tion had  more  the  character  of  a  stain  than  of  applied  pigments. 
The  finest  touch  of  water-colours  was  so  incongruous  with  the 
delicate  surface  of  the  picture  that  a  coarse,  patchy  effect 
was  the  result  in  all  cases,  no  matter  how  skilfully  applied. 
Curiously  enough,  the  untouched  Daguerreotype  presented  fewer 
of  the  crudities  of  texture,  was  less  cruel  in  its  renderings  of 
wrinkles,  freckles,  and  rugosities,  than  any  later  form  of  photo- 
graphic portraiture. 

On  the  advent  of  the  collodion  process,  photographs  on  paper 
gradually  superseded  the  Daguerreotype.     At  its  best,  the  paper 


KETOUCHING. 


117 


print  fell  far  short  of  the  delicacy  of  the  silver  plate,  and  at  its 
worst  it  was  often  a  sadly  coarse,  stained,  smudgy  affair.  Now 
commenced  the  practice  of  retouching  on  the  print  to  remove 
technical  defects,  and  ameliorate,  as  far  as  possible,  what  appeared 
to  be  inherent  photographic  shortcomings.  Then  followed  those 
abominations  consisting  of  photographic  prints  entirely  worked 
up  in  Indian  ink  or  sepia,  the  photographic  image  being 
generally  destroyed,  and  a  hard,  unnatural,  badly-drawn  mono- 
chrome presented  in  its  place.  None  of  these  methods  were 
effective  against  freckles.  Then  it  struck  photographers  that 
the  proper  thing  to  touch  up  was  the  model,  and  all  kinds  of 
powders  and  cosmetics  were  brought  into  play,  until  sitters  did 
not  think  they  were  being  properly  treated  if  their  faces  and 
hair  were  not  powdered  until  they  looked  like  a  ghastly  mockery 
of  the  clown  in  a  pantomine.  There  are  sitters  even  now  who 
will  not  believe  they  are  being  taken  in  the  truly  foreign 
manner — " where  the  light  is  so  clear,  you  know" — if  the 
photographer  does  not  dust  their  heads  a  little  by  way  of 
throwing  dust  in  their  eyes. 

The  idea  of  retouching  on  the  negative  very  tardily  dawned 
on  the  photographic  community,  and  it  came  slowly  into  general 
practice,  until  about  the  year  1867,  when  its  uses  were  generally 
recognised,  and  its  abuses,  of  course,  quickly  followed.  The 
removal  of  blemishes  like  stains  and  pinholes  in  the  negative  was 
customary.  It  is  probable,  moreover,  that  for  many  years  before 
the  practice  of  retouching  had  become  general,  some  photo- 
graphers manipulated  their  negatives  considerably,  carefully 
preserving  their  practice  in  this  way  as  a  secret.  A  case  may  be 
remembered,  many  years  ago,  at  a  photographic  exhibition, 
when  the  fine  contributions  of  a  very  able  photographer  were 
challenged  by  another  portraitist  as  being  retouched.  The 
response  to  this  was  an  offer  to  permit  the  prints  to  be  sponged 
with  water.  The  challenger  insisted  that  the  stippling  was 
manifest  beyond  question  when  the  prints  were  examined  by  a 


118  THE   STUDIO. 


magnifying  glass.  The  production  of  unmounted  prints  with 
precisely  similar  gradation,  which  was  not  removed  by  sponging, 
seemed  to  settle  the  matter  by  deciding  that  there  could  be  no 
retouching,  the  negatives  never  being  suspected. 

There  can  be  no  doubt  now — and  if  there  were  any  I  can  set 
it  at  rest,  for  I  have  seen  many  of  the  negatives — that  the 
exquisite  vignettes  of  the  late  T.  K.  Williams,  which  were  the 
admiration  and  despair  of  the  photographers  of  thirty  years 
ago,  owed  much  of  their  beauty  to  very  judicious  retouching  on 
the  negative,  added  to  the  great  care  and  almost  fastidious  taste 
of  that  admirable  photographer.  Retouching,  used  at  a  time 
when  the  process  was  not  suspected,  gave  these  portraits  a 
superiority  over  others  that  it  is  now  almost  impossible  to 
believe. 

The  use  of  lead  pencils  for  retouching  upon  the  negative  first 
rendered  this  operation  possible  as  a  popular  process.  Stippling 
upon  a  varnished  surface  with  wet  pigments  was  a  difficult 
process,  requiring  great  manipular  skill,  and  few  of  those 
possessing  that  skill  were  familiar  with  the  requirements  of 
negative  retouching,  in  which  the  degree  of  opacity  or  trans- 
lucency  of  each  touch  is  of  more  importance  than  its  appearance 
by  reflected  light.  The  first  suggestion  for  the  use  of  lead  pencil 
for  this  purpose  came  from  Germany  in  1866.  Since  that  time 
the  system  has  steadily  progressed.  Its  use  in  any  degree  has 
been  strongly  condemned  by  photographic  purists  as  a  departure 
from  the  truth  as  it  is  in  photography,  and,  curiously  enough, 
one  of  its  most  staunch  opponents  was  one  who  was  unrivalled  in 
the  artistic  manipulation  of  the  negative  in  printing  operations — 
the  late  0.  G.  Eejlander.  In  the  earlier  years  of  negative 
retouching,  photographers  would  confess  its  use  with  apology  and 
hesitation.  It  soon,  however,  acquired  a  firm  foothold  in  the 
studio  of  every  portraitist,  and  the  skilled  retoucher  was  indis- 
pensable. In  this  country  the  legitimacy  of  the  process,  per  se, 
is  no  longer  discussed,  but  is,  by  general  consent,  tacitly  admitted. 


RETOUCHING.  119 


Excess  is,  of  course,  condemned  as  inartistic,  untrue,  and  unwise, 
even  by  those  who  most  egregiously  overstep  the  fair  line  of 
legitimacy.  Photographers  occasionally  discuss  the  subject  still. 
Even  those  who  object  to  its  use  artistically  defend  the  practice 
as  necessary  to  meet  the  demands  of  the  public,  every  individual 
of  whom,  whilst  professing  to  require  the  simple  truth  of  photo- 
graphy without  retouching,  invariably  protests  against  receiving 
a  portrait  in  which  the  retoucher's  art  had  not  been  more  or  less 
employed.  Others  hope  that  the  mania  for  retouching  will  run 
its  course ;  that  unreasonable  excess  will  bring  reaction. 

Where  excess  of  retouching  not  only  levels  all  ages,  and  makes 
it  difficult  to  distinguish  the  portrait  of  the  grandmother  from 
the  pretty  girl  of  twenty,  who  is  so  like  her ;  and  where  it 
destroys  the  texture  of  the  flesh,  and  substitutes  that  of  chiselled 
marble,  its  evil  is  beyond  dispute.  Where  it  is  or  may  be  used 
for  fraud,  the  evil  is  still  more  lamentable.  Some  years  ago 
there  was  a  case  in  which  a  portrait  from  an  untouched  and 
somewhat  harsh  negative,  and  one  from  a  fine  negative  of  the 
same  sitter,  very  carefully  retouched,  so  as  to  remove  lines, 
wrinkles,  or  rugosities,  were  prepared  for  exhibiting  in  court, 
the  latter  as  showing  the  state  of  an  individual  before  a  misfortune 
for  which  he  claimed  damages,  and  the  former  as  showing  the 
distressing  effect  produced  upon  his  health  by  the  misfortune 
for  which  damages  were  claimed.  It  is  probable  that  the  two 
portraits  were  produced  in  the  order  of  time  claimed  for  them  ; 
but  the  misused  art  of  the  retoucher  might  make  either  of  them 
tell  the  tale  either  of  decrepitude  or  vigorous  health. 

The  common  complaint  against  excessive  retouching  has  much 
less  justification  than  is  supposed.  That  which  is  frequently 
described  as  excess  in  retouching  is  less  the  result  of  excess  than 
of  ignorance.  It  is  not  that  there  is  too  much  of  the  pencil,  but 
that  it  is  applied  in  the  wrong  place.  A  very  little  unskilful 
retouching  will  remove  the  texture  of  the  flesh,  and  leave  that  of 
stone;  will  remove  the  expression  of  a  living  face,  and  leave 


120  THE    STUDIO. 


that  of  a  mask  ;  whilst  the  same  amount  of  retouching  applied 
with  knowledge  and  intelligence  would  have  retained  the  texture 
of  flesh,  removing  only  the  temporary  and  accidental  blemishes 
and  the  exaggerations  of  photography  which  interfered  with 
truth  and  beauty ;  would  have  given  fuller  effect  to  a  fine 
expression,  or  subdued  a  suspicion  of  frowning  or  weariness  by 
delicate  touches  applied  in  the  right  place.  Photographers, 
innocent  alike  of  the  structure  of  the  human  face  and  of  any 
knowledge  of  drawing,  unhesitatingly  retouch  negatives  without 
the  slightest  idea  that  any  other  qualification  than  a  photographic 
eye  and  a  steady  hand  is  necessary.  They  neatly  fill  up  wrinkles 
and  scars  and  soften  shadows,  until  they  produce  a  face  almost 
as  smooth  and  quite  as  expressionless  as  a  billiard  ball.  And, 
what  is  more,  they  are  proud  of  the  result ! 

Retouching,  then,  may  now  be  included  amongst  the  legitimate 
processes  of  photography.  That  it  is  unfortunately  open  to 
abuse,  and  that  the  abuse  of  it  in  ignorant  eyes  is  beautiful, 
cannot  be  helped.  There  is  a  class  of  people  who  never  care  to 
refer  to  nature.  "With  them,  to  be  smooth  and  soft  is  to  be 
beautiful.  They  may  not  care  to  have  their  own  faces  enamelled, 
but  they  do  not  object  to  the  highly-retouched  fraud  which 
represents  them  as  marble,  and  will  complacently  offer  it  to  you 
as  a  portrait  of  themselves. 

Retouching  is  legitimate  when  it  does  not  falsify  nature ;  it 
should  be  used  only  to  aid  the  well-known  shortcoming  of 
photography.  In  nature  we  scarcely  see  a  freckle  on  the  face  if 
we  do  not  look  closely  for  it ;  in  the  negative  the  freckle  is 
represented  by  a  hole  which  prints  much  darker  than  the  freckle 
appears  in  nature  ;  it  is  legitimate  to  fill  up  this  hole  so  that  the 
result  may  the  better  represent  nature.  A  warm  shadow  or 
reflected  light  may  come  out  darker  than  in  nature  :  these  places 
may  be  aided  and  strengthened.  A  high-light  may  fall  short  of 
the  sparkle  of  the  original ;  this  may  also  be  strengthened. 

To  know  when  to  leave  off  should  be  the  aim  of  the  retoucher. 


RETOUCHING. 


121 


He  is  the  best  artist  who  knows  when  his  work  is  done.  If  as 
much  time  and  thought  were  taken  to  get  perfect  negatives  as 
is  spent  in  correcting  imperfections,  the  retoucher's  art  would 
come  nearly  to  an  end. 


CHAPTER  XIX, 

HINTS    TO    SITTERS. 

photographers  have  published  little  pamphlets  and 
circulars  addressed  to  their  patrons  to  teach  them  how  to  dress 
and  what  to  do  when  they  go  to  sit  for  their  portraits.  They 
are  first  told  how  to  make  appointments,  then  follow  instructions 
what  to  do  "  when  you  visit  us."  Some  of  the  advice  must  be 
quite  appalling  to  nervous  sitters.  The  injunction  to  keep  steady 
if  you  want  "a  thing  of  beauty,"  and  not  to  object  to  anything, 
but  to  "  place  yourself  entirely  in  our  operator's  hands,"  is  so 
disquieting  that  it  is  scarcely  compensated  for  by  the  promise 
that  if  you  do  you  will  be  rewarded  with  the  best  results. 
"What  can  give  a  sitter  a  more  serious  impression  of  the  pro- 
found nature  of  the  operation  than  the  following: — "Do  not 
object  to  the  head-rest ;  it  is  quite  essential  for  keeping  the  sitter 
steady  after  being  posed.  It  is  more  difficult  to  sit  steady  than 
you  would  think,  and  remember  the  slighest  movement  spoils 
the  picture."  The  information  is  right  enough,  but  why  bother 
the  sitter  with  it  ?  You  are  not  to  come  flushed  and  panting,  or 
your  face  will  come  out  black.  You  are  to  come  in  a  pleasant 
frame  of  mind,  because  "  the  reflex  of  the  mental  condition  is 
unavoidably  indexed  on  the  face."  You  must  choose  your  dress 
and  jewellery  with  discrimination,  and  as  the  operator  orders. 
You  are  not  to  stare,  but  may  wink — a  liberty  for  which  the 


HINTS    TO    SITTERS.  123 


sitter  must  feel  grateful.  You  are  not  to  pile  your  hair  on  the 
top  of  the  head,  and  you  may  introduce  curls  occasionally  with 
advantage.  Powder  is  recommended  to  give  detail  which  would 
be  otherwise  wanted,  but  how  it  does  so  is  rather  puzzling. 
And  then  comes  the  inevitable  condemnation  of  some  colours  for 
dresses,  such  as  blue,  lilac,  and  lavender,  and  recommendation 
of  others,  such  as  black,  claret,  scarlet,  pea  green,  yellow, 
crimson,  slate,  and  especially  black  silk  and  black  lace. 

All  this  is  better  left  alone.  To  print  all  these  directions, 
even  if  they  were  the  reverse  of  very  foolish,  is  to  give  the 
operation  of  sitting  for  a  portrait  such  importance  that  the 
victims  will  be  inclined  to  think  very  seriously  of  it,  and  look 
like  it.  It  is  my  experience  that  the  more  a  sitter  is  prepared, 
the  worse  he  sits.  The  more  he  doesn't  know  what  you  are  going 
to  do  with  him  the  better  will  be  his  portrait.  Of  course  it  does 
happen  sometimes  that  a  lady  comes  most  unsuitably  dressed — 
say  in  stiff  white  material,  spotted  or  barred  with  black  velvet, 
or  in  loud  checks.  It  is  much  better  to  tell  her  quietly  that  the 
dress  is  unsuitable,  and  get  her  to  postpone  the  sitting,  than  to- 
give  her  printed  directions  what  to  do  which  only  help  to  confuse 
her.  Nearly  the  only  stipulation  the  photographer  should 
make  with  a  lady  sitter  is,  that  she  should  come  dressed  like  her- 
self. This  is  important,  for  ladies  are  sometimes  inclined  to- 
make  experiments  and  try  an  unaccustomed  costume.  If  they 
come  "  as  guys,  or  in  disguise  " — if  I  may  quote  from  one  of  the 
jealously- guarded  rules  of  the  Solar  Club — they  cannot  expect 
to  look  like  themselves.  Photographers  are  suffering  much  from 
ladies'  dress  at  the  present  time.  I  don't  mean  that  it  is  ugly — 
I  have  said  my  say  on  that  matter  in  a  former  chapter — but  from 
the  make,  or  cut,  or  fit  of  the  dress.  The  operator  can  some- 
times get  rid  of  a  mass  of  bulbous  ugliness  by  recommending  a 
vignette  head ;  but  it  is  in  this  kind  of  picture  that  the  present 
difficulty  arises.  The  dresses  are  made  perfectly  plain  in  the 
body,  and  it  is  not  in  nature,  to  say  nothing  of  the  dressmaker's 


J24  THE    STUDIO. 


art,  that  wrinkles  should  not  show  in  a  part  that  is  constantly 
moving.  It  seems  to  be  a  point  of  the  first  consideration  that 
no  wrinkles  shall  show,  and  that  the  shoulders  shall  be  as  smooth 
as  marble.  Everything  has  to  be  sacrificed  to  this  one  fad. 
Ease  and  grace  are  disregarded;  but  the  shoulders  must  be 
thrown  back  to  keep  the  dress  tight.  I  should  say  that  at  the 
present  there  are  more  re-sittings  to  get  rid  of  these  insignificant 
but  perfectly  natural  wrinkles  than  from  any  other  cause. 

There  are  some  gentle  hints  that  the  photographer  may  very 
properly  suggest.  People  often  come  in  from  the  country  to 
have  their  hair  cut,  to  go  to  the  dentist,  and  to  be  photographed. 
I  think  they  may  be  gently  warned  against  the  absurdity  of 
combining  these  operations  in  one  visit ;  but  if  they  must  take 
place  on  the  same  day,  the  photographer  may  fairly  ask  to  have 
first  show. 

The  photographer  ought  to  be  able  to  make  presentable 
pictures  out  of  any  subject  brought  to  him,  but  there  are  some 
things  to  which  he  may  reasonably  take  objection ;  others  that  he 
once  upon  a  time  refused  to  have  anything  to  do  with,  are  often 
now  his  great  delight.  At  one  time  white  dresses  were  strongly 
objected  to  for  ladies  and  children,  but  now  the  judicious  photo- 
grapher will  welcome  them  with  pleasure.  He  has  so  improved 
his  methods  of  lighting  that  an  object  that  once  came  out  as  a 
mere  blank  mass  of  white  paper  can  now  be  made  to  take  the 
most  delicate  and  subtle  shades.  A  white  dress,  lighted  from 
behind,  usually  comes  well,  especially  if  it  is  not  straight  from 
the  wash ;  a  dress  that  has  been  worn  some  time  always  looks 
better  in  a  photograph  than  a  new  one. 

There  are  other  hints — and  broad  ones,  too — that  may  be  given 
to  sitters  without  going  to  the  extreme  length  of  sending  them 
a  pamphlet  on  the  subject.  Tor  instance,  a  hint  may  be  given 
that  a  little  dog  is  a  very  objectionable  animal  in  a  studio  ;  that 
when  he  is  taking  a  portrait  the  operator  has  something  more 
important  to  think  of  than  dogs,  and  cannot  be  responsible  for 


HINTS    TO    SITTERS.  125 


their  lives  if  they  run  between  his  legs.  Another  hint  has  some- 
times to  he  given  that  you  cannot  talk  over  business  matters 
with  the  sitter's  friends  while  you  are  thinking  about  the  pose 
and  exposure  ;  and  I  have  known  it  to  be  necessary  to  suggest 
to  a  sitter  or  his  friend  that  he  must  not  smoke  in  the  studio. 
There  have  been  rare  occasions  when  I  have  gone  even  further. 

The  strongest  hint  I  ever  saw  made  to  sitters  was  printed  in 
large  letters  on  a  screen,  at  which  the  sitter  was  made  to  look 
when  the  exposure  was  made.  It  ran  to  this  effect : — "  You  are 
expected  to  pay  at  the  time  of  sitting  ! "  There  was  a  mingling 
of  business  with  art  in  this  that  could  not  be  considered  as 
an  aid  to  expression,  and  which  I  never  could  approve  of. 

Another  useful  hint  to  a  sitter  who  is  troublesome  in  that 
difficult  matter  of  re-sittings,  is  that  the  negatives  and  prints  of 
all  portraits  not  approved  are  invariably  destroyed  before  the 
re-sitting.  This  circumvents  those  unreasonable  people  whose 
only  object — which  they  have  to  gain  by  aid  of  untruths — is  to 
have  a  large  and  varied  collection  to  select  from. 


CHAPTER  XX, 

HOW  TO  SHOW  PHOTOGRAPHS. 

A  GOOD  photograph  badly  mounted  is  like  a  jewel  ill- set,  and  a 
great  part  of  its  beauty  is  lost.  No  artist  should  be  indifferent 
to  the  manner  and  style  in  which  his  work  is  shown  to  the 
public.  A  glance  round  the  Royal  Academy  Exhibitions  will 
show  that  more  attention  is  being  given  year  by  year  to  the 
suitability  of  the  frame  to  the  picture  which  it  encloses.  Many 
artists  design  their  own.  A  few  hints  and  suggestions  on  the 
subject  may^not  be  out  of  place.  We  will  commence  with  a 
consideration  of  how  to  show  a  card  portrait. 

Nothing  fanciful  should  be  allowed  in  the  mounting  of  a  carte- 
de-visite.  This  card  should  be  plain,  either  white,  or,  what  is 
perhaps  better,  a  very  light  buff  or  cream  colour.  Pinks,  the 
various  shades  of  mauve,  and  cold  greys  are  most  unsuitable ; 
the  thick  black  and  chocolate  mounts,  with  gold  bevelled  edges, 
effectively  show  up  the  photograph,  the  one  thing  against  them 
being  that  their  thickness  prevents  their  use  in  albums.  There 
are  green  cards  of  this  kind  that  do  not  harmonize  with  the 
picture.  The  margin  should  not  be  wider  than  one-sixteenth  of 
an  inch,  with  a  quarter  or  five-sixteenths  of  an  inch  at  the 
bottom,  upon  which  it  is  allowable  for  the  photographer  to  print 
his  name,  very  faintly,  in  black  or  brown  ink ;  but  to  print  the 
name  large,  or  in  staring  red  letters,  not  only  shows  bad  taste, 


HOW    TO    SHOW    PHOTOGRAPHS.  127 

but  detracts  from  the  effect  of  the  picture.  Printed  lines  round 
the  edge  of  the  card  are  wrong,  so  are  round  corners ;  but  when 
the  lines  and  round  corners  are  combined,  they  appear  to  have 
entered  into  a  conspiracy  to  spoil  the  picture,  and  generally 
succeed,  however  good  it  may  be.  I  hold  it  to  be  as  necessary 
to  have  the  photographer's  name  on  the  back  of  the  card — 
always  supposing  the  picture  is  not  a  copy — as  it  is  to  have  a 
picture  on  the  front ;  but  the  name  must  not  be  set  forth  in  a 
glaring  design,  full  of  curlycues  and  flourishes,  but  in  a  modest 
and  quiet  fashion ;  not  as  though  you  were  ashamed  of  it,  but 
without  any  advertising  dash.  A  thin  card  is  better  than  a 
thick  one ;  it  feels  better  if  well  rolled,  and  does  not  fill  up  the 
book  so  much  as  a  thick  one  would. 

To  cabinet  pictures  and  larger  sizes  mounted  with  narrow 
margins  the  same  general  rules  will  apply,  except  that  the 
margins  should  be  proportionately  wider. 

As  to  the  framing  of  cartes-de-visite  and  cabinets,  there  is 
such  an  infinite  variety  of  devices  provided  for  this  purpose  by 
manufacturers,  that  it  is  difficult  to  offer  any  advice  on  the  sub- 
ject. However,  you  may  take  this  as  a  general  rule :  do  not 
overframe.  Let  us  degenerate  into  anecdote.  Some  years  ago 
I  was  present  at  the  unpacking  of  some  of  the  pictures  sent  to 
one  of  our  exhibitions.  There  was  one  case  brought  in  with 
difficulty — it  was  enormous,  it  filled  the  hall.  I  said  to  the 
porter,  before  it  was  opened,  "  We  must  have  a  few  tons  of  very 
fine  pictures  here."  Other  cases  were  neglected;  we  opened 
the  large  one.  The  parturient  mountain  brought  forth  a  little 
mouse :  the  case  was  full  of  most  tremendous  specimens  of  the 
carver  and  gilder's  art,  but  there  was  very  little  art  of  any  other 
kind.  Amongst  others,  there  was  one  large  moulded  frame, 
several  inches  in  depth,  and  with  a  gilt  matt  inside;  it  con- 
tained seven  cartes-de-visite  of  the  cameo  form — that  was  all — 
reminding  one  of  Falstaff's  halfpennyworth  of  bread  to  an  in- 
tolerable deal  of  sack.  I  have  entered  more  fully  into  this  part 


128  THE  STUDIO. 


of  the  subject,  because  there  is  evidence  in  exhibitions  of  a  great 
attempt  to  hide  bad  work  in  gorgeous  frames.  An  oil  painting 
will  carry  a  heavy  frame,  but  a  photograph,  except  it  is  large 
and  dark,  will  not.  It  should  rather  be  classed  in  this  respect 
as  a  water-colour  drawing,  which  should  never  be  smothered  in 
carving  and  gold. 

To  return  to  cartes  and  cabinets  and  small  sizes  for  a  few 
moments.  Heavy  plush  frames  in  every  variety  of  gaudy  colour 
have  been  very  fashionable  for  some  time,  the  unique  hideous- 
ness  of  which  fairly  surpasses  anything  ever  invented  in  the 
way  of  unfitness.  The  brightly-coloured  plush  is  allowed  to  be 
in  contact  with  the  photograph  ;  there  is  no  gilt  flat  or  bead  to 
prevent  the  injurious  contrast,  and  the  general  impression,  on  a 
first  look  at  a  photograph  thus  gorgeously  framed,  is  that  the 
poor  little  thing  is  a  disgrace  to  its  surroundings.  Now  this  is 
a  reversal  of  the  intention  of  a  frame,  which  should  be  to  set  off 
and  benefit  the  picture. 

In  the  same  way,  the  very  elaborate  albums  with  sometimes 
beautifully  designed  and  coloured  leaves,  forming  borders  for 
the  photographs,  destroy  by  their  beauty  the  very  thing  they 
are  designed  to  show  off  and  honour.  The  object  of  an  album 
is  to  hold  portraits  or  other  photographs,  and  it  should  be 
designed  so  as  to  assist  the  effect  of  those  photographs  in  every 
way.  They  should  be  plain  and  good.  I  do  not  object  to  a  line 
round  the  apertures,  but  I  prefer  them  without.  The  apertures 
should  be  square  or  oval,  or  both  ;  but  fanciful  shapes,  such  as 
the  dome  and  cushion,  should  be  rejected. 

Yelvet  frames  of  a  modest  colour,  such  as  marone,  are  good, 
especially  for  finished  pictures  on  opal,  either  in  monochrome  or 
colour ;  but  the  velvet  must  always  be  divided  from  the  photo- 
graph with  at  least  half-an-inch  of  gold. 

A  landscape  is  best  mounted  in  or  on  a  light  buff  mount,  with 
a  margin  from  three  to  four  inches,  according  to  size,  without 
gilt  lines,  and  enclosed  in  a  frame  not  more  than  two  or  three 


HOW   TO    SHOW   PHOTOGRAPHS.  129 

inches  in  depth.  A  one-inch  bead  is  sufficient  for  sizes  under 
10  by  8.  A  running  ornament  round  the  frame  is  not  objection- 
able, so  that  it  is  neat,  and  if  there  are  no  heavy  corners.  If 
you  send  frames  with  elaborate  corners  to  exhibitions,  you  are 
pretty  sure  to  get  them  back  in  more  pieces  than  is  desirable, 
and  they  will  not  get  good  places.  In  the  first  place,  it  is  im- 
possible, in  arranging  an  exhibition,  to  think  much  of  the  pre- 
servation of  the  frames ;  in  the  next,  heavy  frames  are  put  aside 
for  further  consideration,  however  good  the  pictures  may  be 
they  contain.  But,  as  usual,  there  is  a  lower  depth,  the  Oxford 
frame.  However  anxious  the  " hangers"  may  be  to  do  their 
best,  they  draw  the  line  at  the  Oxford  frame ;  they  can  keep 
their  tempers  till  they  come  to  these  sprawling  abominations, 
and  then  "  the  worst  inn's  worst  room  "  is  nothing  to  the  place 
these  are  consigned  to,  if  a  place  bad  enough  can  be  found. 
These  "hints  to  exhibitors  "  are  worth  remembering. 

Of  late  years  a  great  deal  of  oak,  principally  in  light  tints,  has 
been  used  for  framing  photographs.  The  patterns  are  usually 
unobjectionable,  and  some  of  them,  when  the  flutings  and  other 
parts  are  gilt,  are  quite  beautiful,  and  fit  for  drawing-room  use. 
An  inch  flat  of  light  oak  with  an  inch  of  gilt  beading  make  an 
admirable  exhibition  frame.  It  is  cheap,  looks  well,  and  defies 
the  horny-handed  porters  to  scratch  or  destroy  it. 

Large  and  dark  portraits  are  best  framed  close  up  in  gilt  or 
dark  frames  two  or  three  inches  in  depth,  with  a  broad  gilt  flat. 
Vignettes  are  better  in  a  lighter  style  of  framing ;  oval  mounts, 
light  buff  or  warm  grey,  in  simple  gilt  frames. 

A  plain  photograph  should  never  be  exhibited  in  the  same 
room  with  oil-pictures  or  water-colour  drawings.  Due  attention 
should  be  paid  to  the  colour  of  the  paper  of  the  wall  on  which 
photographs  are  hung.  The  pattern  should  be  delicate  and  un- 
pronounced,  of  a  geometrical  or  conventional  design,  without  any 
staring  contrasts  of  colours.  The  tone  of  colour  may  be  of  a 
dull  red  or  chocolate,  or,  what  is  perhaps  better,  a  sage  green. 

x 


130  THE    STUDIO. 


In  showing  a  coloured  photograph,  the  light  should  be  so  arranged 
as  to  fall  upon  it  from  the  direction  in  which  it  was  allowed  to 
fall  upon  the  picture  while  the  artist  was  at  work  upon  it — 
almost  always  from  the  left.  When  the  picture  is  viewed  with 
the  light  from  the  right,  all  the  inequalities  of  the  surface  of  the 
paper  are  seen,  and  the  work  appears  coarse  and  slovenly.  The 
reason  of  this  is,  that  the  artist,  in  working  up  his  picture,  fills  up 
with  stippling  all  the  inequalities  he  sees ;  these  inequalities, 
however  fine  the  surface  of  the  paper  may  be,  are  caused  by  the 
grain  of  the  paper,  also  by  the  minutely  different  thicknesses  of 
the  colour  he  applies,  and  it  would  be  utterly  impossible  to  finish 
a  picture  that  would  appear  as  well  with  the  light  one  way  as 
the  other. 

In  their  useful  little  volume,  "  Painting  Popularly  Explained," 
Messrs.  Timbs  and  Grullick  recommend:  "For  water-colour 
paintings  it  is  especially  important  that  the  frames  should  not 
be  heavy  or  too  profusely  ornamented.  A  massive  frame  will 
almost  destroy  the  effect  of  delicate  work  in  water-colours. 
Burnishing  small  points  of  the  frame  is,  however,  from  the 
greater  vivacity  of  water-colours,  less  objectionable  than  when 
the  frame  is  intended  to  enclose  an  oil  picture.  The  glass  of  the 
frame  should  not  touch  the  face  of  the  painting.  The  '  mount,' 
or  margin  intervening  between  the  water- colour  painting  and  its 
frame,  is  almost  invariably  white ;  though  it  might  not  unfre- 
quently  with  great  advantage  be  tinted,  especially  if  the  paint- 
ing is  merely  a  vignette.  For  all  delicate  work  light  in  tone,  a 
paper  mount  is  preferable;  and  for  such,  a  simple  gold  bead 
frame  with  a  gold  edge  to  the  mount  next  the  picture  is  very 
suitable.  But  more  powerfully  and  intensely-coloured  water 
paintings,  especially  if  warm  in  tone,  might  often  be  rendered 
far  more  effective  and  harmonious  by  substituting  a  gold  mount." 

Large  oil  pictures  are  chiefly  exhibited  without  glass,  but 
coloured  oil  portraits,  except  the  very  largest,  most  certainly 
look  richer,  more  finely  finished,  and  fuller  in  colour  under  glass. 


HOW    TO    SHOW   PHOTOGRAPHS.  131 


Glass  is  also  a  great  protection  to  the  picture.  "  The  frequent 
assertion  that  glass  interferes  with  the  effect  of  oil  pictures," 
says  Buskin,  "is  wholly  irrelevant.  If  a  painting  cannot  be 
seen  through  glass,  it  cannot  be  seen  through  its  own  varnish. 
Any  position  which  renders  the  glass  offensive  by  its  reflection 
will  in  like  manner  make  the  glaze  of  the  surface  of  the  picture 
visible  instead  of  the  colour.  The  inconvenience  is  less  distinct, 
there  being  often  only  a  feeble  glimmer  on  the  varnish,  when 
there  would  be  a  vivid  flash  on  the  glass ;  but  the  glimmer  is 
quite  enough  to  prevent  the  true  colours  being  seen;  while 
there  is  this  advantage  in  the  glass,  that  it  tells  the  spectator 
when  he  cannot  see,  whereas  the  glimmer  of  the  varnish  often 
passes,  with  an  inattentive  observer,  for  a  feeble  part  of  the  real 
painting,  and  he  does  not  try  to  get  into  a  better  position. " 

The  permanency  of  a  silver  print — and,  to  a  less  extent,  all 
other  pictures  on  paper,  whether  photograph,  engraving,  or 
water-colour  drawing — depends  on  the  way  in  which  it  is  framed 
and  kept.  The  frame  should  be  air-tight  and  well  protected 
from  damp.  Perhaps  nothing,  after  they  are  mounted,  is  so 
destructive  to  photographs  as  damp.  It  mildews  carbon  prints, 
and  quickly  insists  on  silver  prints  fading  away.  The  air  should 
be  rigidly  excluded.  It  is  common  to  see  the  back  of  a  frame 
pasted  up,  but  rare  to  find  the  glass  pasted  in.  This  should 
always  be  done.  Every  possible  precaution  should  be  taken  to 
avoid  damp  walls.  This  is  so  necessary  that  I  never  think  any 
walls  are  safe  that  are  not  made  damp-proof,  for  which  purpose 
I  prefer  a  lining  of  Willesden  paper — a  material  which,  by-the- 
bye,  is  useful  for  many  photographic  purposes. 

This  subject  is  open  to  much  expansion,  but  with  these  few 
hints  I  will  leave  it. 


CHAPTER  XXL 

THE    ITINERANT    PAINTER. 

CLOSELY  connected  with,  the  subject  of  portrait  photography, 
and  of  great  interest  to  the  professional  photographer,  is  that  of 
the  ownership  of  the  negative  and  future  orders. 

When  a  well-established  photographer  takes  a  portrait,  he 
looks  for  his  profit,  not  only  to  the  sum  he  receives  for  the  first 
order  for  copies,  but  to  the  contingent  potentialities  which  may 
arise  from  the  possession  of  the  negatives,  and  to  that  end  he 
goes  to  a  great  deal  of  trouble  and  expense  in  cataloguing  and 
storing  them.  Of  course  the  great  proportion  of  these  nega- 
tives are  never  wanted  again,  and  are  an  incumbrance ;  but  all 
professional  photographers  know  that  there  is  so  good  a  demand 
for  copies  from  old  negatives,  that  they  find  it  to  their  interest 
to  keep  all  they  take,  and  to  print  prominently  on  the  back  of 
their  cards,  "  All  negatives  are  preserved.  Copies  or  enlarge- 
ments of  this  portrait  can  always  be  had."  Talking  on  this 
subject  the  other  day  to  a  photographer,  he  said,  pointing  to  a 
beautifully  finished  enlargement,  "  Here  is  an  instance.  One 
day,  some  years  ago,  a  shabby  old  gentleman  came  into  the 
reception  room,  and  said  he  wanted  his  portrait  taken.  He  was 
shown  specimens,  but  he  said  they  were  all  too  dear ;  he  could 
only  afford  half-a-guinea,  and  if  I  liked  to  do  it  for  that  sum  he 
should  be  glad  to  have  it  done.  I  liked  the  appearance  of  the 


THE    ITINERANT    PAINTER.  133 

old  man,  who  looked  poor  but  respectable,  so  as  a  kind  of  charity 
I  took  a  negative  of  him.  I  was  so  pleased  with  him,  that  I 
offered  to  send  him  a  dozen  copies  without  charge,  but  he  would 
not  accept  this  offer,  saying  he  had  to  drive  a  bargain  some- 
times but  he  could  pay  his  way,  and  paid  his  half-guinea.  I 
found  afterwards  I  had  entertained  an  angel — a  business  angel 
— unawares,  for  I  have  done  nearly  £300  from  that  negative 
since.  The  fine  old  gentleman  died  soon  afterwards,  and  then  I 
found  he  was  a  famous  manufacturer,  and  that  the  portrait  I  had 
taken  had  a  peculiar  expression  in  the  eyes  of  his  friends,  that 
had  never  been  got  before  in  any  portrait  he  had  had  taken,  and 
the  orders  for  enlargements  poured  in,  and  still  continue."  This 
is,  of  course,  an  extreme  instance  of  the  value  of  a  kept  negative ; 
but  "  back  orders,"  as  they  are  sometimes  called,  are  so  constant 
that  many  photographers  who  keep  careful  statistics  of  their 
business  can  tell  to  a  few  pounds  how  much  their  old  negatives 
will  bring  in  every  year.  Then  they  constitute  one  of  the  bases 
on  which  businesses  are  valued — in  short,  they  are  property. 

It  is  a  constant  complaint  of  photographers  that  they  are 
always  open  to,  or  suffering  from,  the  attacks  of  those  who  want 
to  rob  them  of  this  property.  There  is  a  class  of  people  who 
misuse  the  great  name  of  artist — as,  indeed,  for  the  matter  of  that, 
some  photographers  do,  by  applying  it  to  themselves — who  go 
round  the  country,  and,  by  means  of  introduction  or  impudence, 
obtain  orders  for  portraits,  usually  enlargements  painted  from 
^photographs.  As  they  never  take  an  original  portrait  them- 
selves, they  require  the  negative,  and  use  every  means,  fair  or 
foul,  to  obtain  it,  and  are  usually  successful.  The  method  of 
proceeding  is  something  like  this.  The  father  of  a  family  has 
"been  dead  a  short  time ;  the  itinerant  hears  of  this,  and  before 
she  has  had  time  to  apply  to  a  photographer,  gets  an  introduc- 
tion to  the  widow.  A  great  part  of  his  success  in  his  business 
depends  on  fluent  and  persuasive  speaking,  and  the  lady  is  soon 
induced  to  order  a  portrait  of  her  late  husband.  And  some  of 


134  THE    STUDIO. 


the  "tramps"  are  so  pressing  and  plausible,  that  they  compel 
orders  against  the  will,  or  certainly  against  the  calmer  reason,  of 
their  victims.  "When  the  order  is  booked,  they  ask  to  see  a 
portrait  of  the  husband,  and  take  down  the  name  of  the  photo- 
grapher. They  usually  get  the  widow  to  write  for  the  loan  of 
the  negative,  taking  great  care  to  explain  that  no  injury  shall 
happen  to  it,  and  that  he  is  sure  the  photographer  will  be  de- 
lighted to  lend  it  to  a  brother  artist,  especially  as  it  is  of  no 
further  use  to  himself.  Perhaps  the  photographer  reluctantly 
consents,  seeing  no  way  out  of  it ;  or  he  more  properly  and 
wisely  refuses  to  lend  the  negative.  In  this  case  the  itinerant 
brings  more  pressure  to  bear,  showing  to  his  patron  how  selfish 
and  inconsiderate  the  photographer  is  in  preventing  her  having 
a  splendid  portrait  of  her  husband  now  there  is  such  a  fine 
opportunity.  The  result  is  that  the  unfortunate  photographer 
is  placed  on  the  horns  of  a  dilemma  ;  if  he  consent  to  lend  the 
negative,  he  loses  the  benefits  for  which  he  has  speculatively 
kept  it  for  years ;  and  if  he  refuse,  he  runs  the  risk  of  losing  an 
old  and  good  customer. 

There  are  grades,  even  in  this  low  class  of  art.  There  is  the 
"perfect  gentleman" — that  class  of  gentlemen  who  are  never 
seen  without  their  gloves,  who  select  a  suitable  town  and  take 
a  good  house  or  grand  apartments,  and  work  all  the  country 
round.  Here  is  one  of  the  princes  of  the  profession  who  occa- 
sionally gets  as  much  as  £100  for  a  picture.  This  practitioner 
can  afford,  and  sometimes  does  pay,  the  photographer  for  the  use 
of  a  negative,  but  he  often  induces  him  to  join  in  risky  practices 
that  are  certain  to  bring  him  into  disrepute  with  his  patrons. 
For  nstance,  amongst  the  photographer's  specimens  he  will  see  a 
fine-looking  man  or  a  beautiful  woman,  and,  first  ascertaining  if 
the  game  is  worth  the  candle — that  is,  if  their  proposed  victim 
is  rich  and  amiable,  or  able  to  pay  and  timid — he  paints  his 
picture,  sends  it  to  the  victim  beautifully  framed,  explaining 
as  his  reason  for  painting  it  that  the  head  was  so  fine  that  he 


THE   ITINERANT   PAINTER.  135 

really  could  not  help  trying  to  do  it  justice,  and  he  thinks  he  has 
succeeded.  JS"o  mention  of  price  is  made  in  this  first  experi- 
ment. He  probably  gets  it  back  with  a  letter  of  thanks,  and  a 
civil  word  or  two  about  it  being  very  well  done,  &c.  Then 
begins  a  series  of  puttings  on  of  the  screw,  running  sometimes  at 
the  last  to  the  most  unscrupulous  proceedings,  until  the  victim 
succumbs — and  pays.  It  is  astonishing  what  a  quantity  of  orders 
these  men  will  get,  until  at  last  they  make  the  town  too  hot  to 
hold  them,  and  move  on  to  another. 

These  itinerant  painters  are  not  all  of  the  male  persuasion ;  a 
good  many  are  ladies,  ranging  from  the  old  miniature  painter — 
the  Miss  Le  Creevys  are  not  yet  extinct — down  through 
students  who  have  failed  in  original  art,  to  the  merest  tinters. 
I  hear  of  them  from  all  quarters,  and  am  often  requested  to  give 
advice  as  to  what  is  the  best  manner  of  treating  them.  This  is 
very  difficult  to  give ;  different  circumstances  require  different 
treatment ;  but  in  most  cases  the  best  policy  would  be  to  refuse 
to  have  anything  to  do  with  the  poachers.  It  should  be  easy  to 
explain  to  a  client  that  a  photographer  ought  not  to  be  expected 
to  give  up  the  fruits  of  his  foresight  and  care,  that  he  could 
scarcely  afford  to  warehouse  negatives  for  the  benefit  of  others, 
and  above  all — and  he  must  show  this — that  he  can  produce  as 
good  a  picture  as  the  itinerant  at  the  same  price. 

"Whether  one  photographer  should  occasionally  lend  a  negative 
to  another  is  quite  a  different  question.  I  am  inclined  to  think 
there  are  many  occasions  when  they  should  oblige  one  another — 
it  may  be  for  their  reciprocal  advantage ;  but  I  can  see  nothing 
to  be  gained  by  encouraging  those  who  prowl  about  the  country 
trying  to  get  work  out  of  the  hands  of  those  to  whom  it  legiti- 
mately belongs. 


CHAPTER  XXII, 

THE    EDUCATION    OF    A    PHOTOGRAPHER. 

I  HATE  often  been  asked  the  question,  "  What  is  the  best  course 
of  study  for  a  young  man  who  has  determined  to  devote  his  life 
to  photography  as  a  profession? " 

This  is  a  wide  subject;  let  us  endeavour  to  reduce  it  to  some 
practical  form. 

The  earliest  photographers  took  to  the  art  as  a  business  after 
having  been  trained  to  follow  some  other  path  in  life.  Those 
who  had  received  a  commercial  training  were  best  suited  for  the 
business  part  of  photography — a  not  unimportant  part,  it  must 
be  owned — but  those  who  passed  an  apprenticeship  to  chemistry 
had  a  great  advantage  over  others  as  far  as  the  working  of  pro- 
cesses was  concerned,  and  those  who  had  the  benefit  of  an  artistic 
education  were  in  the  best  position  for  using  the  young  art-science 
as  a  method  of  making  pictures,  which,  after  all,  is  the  great 
end  and  aim  of  photography. 

But  in  those  days  art  training  was  not  thought  so  much  of  as 
it  is  in  our  own.  Where  one  student  learnt  to  draw  then,  a 
hundred  learn  to  draw  now.  There  was  no  regular  art  teaching 
at  that  time ;  now  the  Government  is  alive  to  the  necessity  of 
every  boy  and  girl  knowing  something  of  drawing,  and  there 
are  nearly  a  million  of  students  attending  the  schools  of  art 
spread  all  over  the  kingdom,  without  taking  into  account  the  other 


THE   EDUCATION   OF   A   PHOTOGRAPHER.          137 

millions  who  learn  the  rudiments  of  art  in  Board  schools  and 
from  private  teachers. 

That  art  was  at  so  low  an  ebb  when  photography  was  given 
to  the  world  is  one  of  the  causes  why  it  was  so  long  in  being 
recognised  as  an  art — there  were  no  artists. 

The  young  photographer  does  now,  after  a  fashion,  serve  an 
apprenticeship  to  his  future  business,  but  it  is  a  poor  affair, 
instituted  more  for  the  purpose  of  supplying  the  master  with 
labour  at  low  wages  than  for  the  education  of  the  apprentice. 
He  is  bound  for  a  term  of  years  to  serve  his  master  in  return  for 
instruction  in  the  art  and  mystery  of  photography.  Practically, 
he  gets  a  superficial  knowledge  of  printing,  and  that  is  all.  It 
would  be  safe  to  say  he  never  gets  into  the  studio,  and  seldom 
into  the  developing  room.  He  learns  nothing  of  the  higher 
branches  of  the  art  of  which  printing  is  a  small,  if  important, 
fraction.  There  are  some  photographers,  it  is  true,  who  take  a 
higher  kind  of  apprentice,  in  this  case  called  a  pupil.  The 
pupil,  because  he  pays  a  premium  instead  of  receiving  small 
wages,  gets  taught  a  little  more  than  the  apprentice;  he  is 
taught  how  to  take  a  negative,  and  if  the  photographer  is  very 
conscientious,  he  will  show  him  how  to  light  a  head  in  the 
orthodox  way ;  but  he  seldom  gets  a  chance  of  practising  his  art 
on  a  sitter.  And,  indeed,  I  do  not  see  how  any  photographer 
who  has  any  respect  for  his  art  could  turn  his  work  over  to  a 
pupil.  The  result  is  that  the  student  finds  that  if  he  is  to  get 
the  education  which  will  enable  him  to  achieve  the  highest 
aims,  he  must  help  himself. 

"We  will  now  consider  those  special  studies  which  will  be  of 
most  use  to  him  in  his  profession. 

The  technicalities  belonging  to  the  science  and  the  practice  of 
photography  have  always  had  teachers,  and  are  now  easily 
mastered ;  indeed,  a  very  profound  knowledge  of  chemistry  and 
optics  is  not  required  by  the  practical  photographer;  he  only 
wants  sufficient  knowledge  of  this  kind  to  enable  him  to  under- 


138  THE   STUDIO. 


stand  the  materials  with  which  he  works— nay,  I  will  go  further, 
although  I  know  there  are  many  who  will  not  agree  with  me : 
I  believe  that  a  profound  knowledge  of  the  science  of  photography 
either  in  some  way  cramps  the  artistic  faculty,  or,  what  is  more 
probable,  shows  an  order  of  mind  to  some  extent  inimical  to  a 
feeling  for  art ;  both  faculties  are  very  rarely  found  to  exist  in 
the  same  person. 

Sufficient  facilities,  then,  exist  to  enable  the  student  to  obtain 
all  the  knowledge  of  the  technics  of  photography  that  may  be 
desirable  ;  it  is  the  picture-making  power  of  his  art,  its  capacity 
for  producing  pictorial  results,  results  that  can  be  exhibited — 
and,  I  may  add,  sold — which  is  oftenest  neglected,  but  should 
be  the  photographer's  chief  study  if  he  is  to  put  the  art  to  its 
natural  use. 

There  are  still  those,  as  there  were  in  the  early  days,  who  are 
so  much  fascinated  with  the  scientific  aspects  of  the  art  that  they 
wonder  "what  photographers  want  with  pictures."  These 
enthusiasts  are  worthy  of  all  respect ;  they  are  the  experimenters, 
the  inventors  and  modifiers  of  processes ;  to  these  we  are  in- 
debted for  the  art  itself  ;  but  I  am  speaking  to  those  who  do  not 
want  to  invent,  but  who  are  content  to  use  the  processes  they 
find  ready  to  their  hands,  just  as  a  painter  or  sculptor  would 
take  paint  or  clay  to  show  of  what  excellent  results  the  processes 
are  capable. 

First  and  foremost  of  the  special  studies  necessary  to  the  photo- 
grapher, because  it  is  the  one  thing  on  which  all  art  is  based,  is 
drawing.  I  do  not  mean  that  the  student  need  become  a  painter, 
or  even  a  skilled  draughtsman ;  but  he  must  acquire  sufficient 
facility  in  the  use  of  the  pencil  to  enable  him,  when  he  conceives 
a  picture,  to  make  a  sketch  of  it,  so  as  to  have  his  arrangement 
of  lines  and  distribution  of  light  and  shade  before  him.  If  he 
sees  an  effect  of  chiaroscuro,  or  of  grouping,  a  beautiful  pose,  or 
a  picturesque  suggestion  which  he  may  wish  to  reproduce  with 
the  camera,  he  should  have  the  power  of  preserving  memoranda 


THE   EDUCATION   OF   A   PHOTOGRAPHER.       139 

of  these  effects.  But  drawing  now  is  considered  almost  of  as 
much  importance  as  reading,  writing,  and  arithmetic,  and  is 
taught  in  all  schools  that  are  not  hopelessly  behind  the  age,  so 
I  need  not  dwell  on  the  subject. 

The  student  should  not  omit  to  acquire  some  knowledge  of 
colour  as  applied  to  photographs,  a  branch  of  art  which,  in  its 
technical  details,  differs  considerably  from  painting.  "  Harmo- 
nious Colouring  as  Applied  to  Photographs,"  a  new  edition  of 
which,  almost  entirely  re- written,  has  just  been  published  by 
Mr.  Newman,  24,  Soho  Square,  is  the  best  treatise  on  the 
subject,  if  not  the  only  one  now  in  print. 

The  study  of  art  in  its  most  comprehensive  sense  is,  doubtless, 
the  work  of  a  lifetime  ;  but  there  are  one  or  two  initial  truths- 
which  should  be  clearly  understood,  and  thoroughly  impressed 
on  the  mind  of  the  student.  First,  that  very  little  of  art  can  be 
taught.  Second,  that  the  chief  portions  of  art  which  can  be 
taught  consist  in  tolerably  definite  and  simple  rules  and 
principles  easily  understood  and  remembered,  and  not  difficult 
to  apply.  These  rules  are  to  art  what  grammar  is  to  literature. 
They  will  no  more  enable  the  painter  to  paint  a  Transfiguration 
than  grammar  taught  Shakespeare  how  to  write  Hamlet ;  but 
neither  the  great  picture  nor  the  great  poem  could  have  been 
produced  without,  on  the  one  hand,  a  knowledge  of  composition, 
and,  on  the  other,  an  acquaintance  with  the  construction  of  the 
English  language.  And  third,  that  after  the  mastering  of 
certain  rules,  art  study  chiefly  consists  in  constant  observation 
and  appreciation  of  the  beauties  of  nature  and  art,  and  in 
attempts  to  realise  in  practice  these  beauties,  aided  by  the  rules- 
and  principles  before  acquired. 

First. — Thompson,  in  his  "  Outlines  of  the  Necessary  Laws  of 
Thought,"  says,  "  The  whole  of  every  science  may  be  made  the 
subject  of  teaching.  Not  so  with  art;  much  of  it  is  not 
teachable."  This  arises  from  the  fact  that  so  much  of  art, 
especially  in  its  higher  aspects,  belongs  to  feeling  rather  than  to- 


140  THE   STUDIO. 

knowledge.  It  can  be  educed,  developed,  cultivated,  but  not 
communicated.  To  some  minds,  art  education  would  be 
impossible  except  in  a  very  small  degree ;  but  I  will  not  dwell 
on  this  fact,  as  none  are  likely  to  commence  the  study  of  art 
without  some  inclination  towards  it,  from  which  may  be  further 
assumed  the  capacity  in  a  greater  or  less  degree ;  and,  admitting 
fully  the  existence  of  different  degrees  of  natural  ability,  I 
protest  strongly  against  the  cant  which  relies  on  genius  rather 
than  on  effort.  Nothing  except  genius  is  denied  to  well-directed 
labour.  But,  admitting  all  this,  I  wish  again  to  enforce  the 
idea  that  much  of  art  which  can  be  learned  by  the  student  does 
not  consist  in  lessons  which  can  be  taught  by  the  teacher.  The 
knowledge  of  the  laws  which  govern  production  can  be  taught, 
but  the  faculty  of  producing  cannot  be  imparted.  That  student 
has  advanced  little  indeed  in  art  culture  who  has  not  gone  very 
frequently,  both  in  his  conception  and  his  appreciation,  if  not  in 
production,  of  art  excellence,  far  beyond  anything  which  could 
be  definitely  taught  in  any  series  of  rules  or  lessons  on  the 
subject.  My  object  in  enforcing  this  position  is  to  induce  the 
student  to  depend  more  on  his  own  sedulous  self-culture  than  on 
the  number  of  his  lessons,  or  the  skill  of  his  teacher. 

Second. — That  portion  of  art  which  can  be  taught  consists 
ohiefly  of  rules  and  principles  readily  accessible,  tolerably  simple, 
and  not  difficult  to  understand  and  apply.  The  rules  for  the 
painter  relate  to  drawing,  colour,  composition,  and  chiaroscuro. 
Of  drawing  I  have  already  spoken,  and  colour  is  of  comparatively 
little  importance  to  the  photographer,  inasmuch  as  at  present 
this  great  element  in  art  is  not  one  of  the  powers  over  which  he 
has  control.  It  is  chiefly  to  a  study  of  composition  and  chiaro- 
scuro that  the  student  must  direct  his  attention.  Here  he  will 
find  much  that  is  definite  clearly  reduced  to  rule,  and  which 
can  be  acquired  from  the  teacher  or  the  book.  It  is  unfortunate 
that  no  complete  and  comprehensive  book  has  been  written  on 
these  subjects;  but  there  are  various  elementary  works  from 


THE    EDUCATION    OF    A    PHOTOGRAPHER.      141 

which,  the  necessary  instructions   can  be  gained.      Howard's 
"Sketcher's  Manual"  and  " Imitative  Art"  are  easily  under- 
stood.     Burnet's  works  on  "Composition"  and  "Light  and 
Shade  "  are  excellent.     If  I  might  mention  my  own  works,  I 
may  say  that  in  "Pictorial  Effect   in  Photography"   I  have 
collected  all  that  I  thought  would  he  of  use  to  the  photographer 
on  both  subjects,  and  have  repeated  the  rules  of  composition 
and  chiaroscuro  more  briefly  in  "  Picture  Making  by  Photo- 
graphy."    Let  the  student  master  the  principles  and  acquire- 
the  rules  at  the  very  threshold  of  his  art  career,  for  here  he  is 
on  firm  ground,  as  all  that  relates  to  the  arrangement  of  lines 
and  tones  can  be  tolerably  clearly  stated.     It  is  the  fashion  now 
with  some  artists  and  writers  on  art  to  deride  rules,  and,  soaring 
into  a  region  of  aesthetic  ecstacy,  become  lost  in  a  cloud  of 
words.     Let  not  the  student  fear  art  rules  where  they  relate  to- 
subjects  which  can  be  clearly  expressed  and  practically  illus- 
trated.    That  cant  which  believes  in  genius  rather  than  work 
generally  repudiates  rule  and  law,  and  affects  to  despise  those 
rules  without  which  the  greatest  geniuses  would  feel  crippled 
instead  of  the  reverse.     Rules  which  have  been  observed  from 
the  earliest  times— rules  which  guided  the  hand   of  Michael 
Angelo  in  the  realisation  of  his  grandest  imaginings,  and  of 
Raphael  in  every  line  he  drew.     It  has  been  asked,  "  What  do 
the  great  artists  care  about  rules  ?     Their  genius  carries  them 
above  such  trammels."     But  such  is  not  the  fact ;  a  great  artist 
adds  a  knowledge  of  fundamental  principles  to  his  other  powers,, 
and  the  more  power  he  has,  the  greater  use  he  makes  of  rules — 
and  the  less  he  shows  he  has  done  so. 

Third. — After  mastering  those  things  which  can  be  reduced 
to  definite  rules  or  clearly  stated  principles,  art  study  chiefly 
consists  in  observation  and  practice,  in  which  the  knowledge 
gained  is  perpetually  applied.  This  is  the  kind  of  study  which, 
with  the  artist,  has  no  termination,  and  in  which  he  acquires 
that  more  exalted  knowledge  which  cannot  be  so  well  put  into- 


142  THE    STUDIO. 


words  as  expressed  in  work,  which  often  transcends,  whilst  it 
never  opposes,  law.  This  study  the  photographer  should  be 
pursuing  whenever  he  visits  a  gallery  of  pictures,  and  marks  in 
what  the  beauty  of  each  consists,  and  how  it  is  produced.  The 
portrait  photographer,  after  he  has  studied  the  rules  to  which  I 
have  referred,  would  find  it  greatly  to  his  advantage  to  make  an 
-exhaustive  study  and  analysis  of  the  contents  of  the  National 
Portrait  Gallery.  He  would  find  here  examples  of  the  por- 
traiture of  this  country  for  several  centuries ;  he  should  then 
visit  the  National  Gallery,  and  compare  the  works  of  the  old 
masters  of  the  Continental  Schools :  note  the  grace  of  Cor- 
regio,  the  dignity  of  Titian  and  Yandyck,  and  the  magic  of 
Hembrandt.  He  should  then  argue  out  with  himself,  with  the 
assistance  of  his  previous  studies,  the  causes  of  these  great 
qualities.  Then  let  him  try  to  reproduce  these  beauties  in  his 
own  work.  Let  him  test  every  picture  he  takes  by  the  know- 
ledge he  possesses,  rigorously  criticising  his  own  work,  first 
ascertaining  whether  it  conforms  to  the  lower  technical  condi- 
tions which  can  be  reduced  to  rule,  and  then  bringing  it  to  the 
higher  tribunal  of  aesthetic  excellence,  and  ascertain  what  of 
expression,  intention,  and  poetry  it  possesses. 

Ask  a  cultivated  artist  how  he  acquired  his  art-knowledge, 
and  he  will  feel  for  a  moment  puzzled,  and  will  next  be  tempted 
to  say  that  it  is  chiefly  a  matter  of  intuition  ;  that  he  possessed 
natural  taste.  He  has,  of  course,  studied  the  rules  of  art ;  but 
he  feels  such  a  disposition  between  his  perception  and  feeling  of 
art  and  its  beauties,  and  the  meagreness  of  the  rules  he  was 
taught,  that  he  is  tempted  to  fall  back,  especially  if  he  has  an 
illogical  mind,  on  this  idea  of  taste.  The  young  student  must 
distrust  this  vague  thiog  called  taste,  and  acquire  the  more  cer- 
tain culture  which  comes  from  study  and  patience.  If  the 
artist  who  has  been  thus  questioned  has  a  logical  mind,  his 
retrospective  glance  over  the  course  of  his  study  brings  him 
finally  to  a  period  when  he  knows  nothing  of  art,  and  when  he 


THE   EDUCATION   OF   A    PHOTOGRAPHER.       143 

only  felt  vaguely  after  it.  He  next  acquired  the  knowledge 
which  could  be  taught,  and  then  proceeded  to  apply  that ;  and 
it  is  by  observation  and  patience,  based  on  the  half-forgotten 
rules,  which  have  now  almost  become  instincts,  that  he  has 
acquired  that  art  culture  which  makes  his  judgment  certain  both 
in  appreciation  and  production. 


CARTER,  POINTERS,  5,  FXJRNIVAL  STREET,  HOLBUHN,  LO.MK.N,  E.C. 


P.  MEAGHER, 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  APPARATUS  MANUFACTURER 


Prize  Medals  Awarded  at  London,  Edinburgh,  Berlin,  and  Paris 


Camera  (as  Fig.  1),  Reversing 
Frame,  Single  Swing,  and  three 
Double  Dark  Slides  6ix4f  ... 


7  16    o 
Carried  forward  £7  16    o 


Brought  forward  £7  16  o 
Ross' Rapid  Symmetrical  Lens  6x5  550 
Leather  Case  for  Camera,  &c.  ...  i  12  6 
Tripoct  Stand  (folding)  0  18  o 

£15  11  6 


Camera  7Jx5 £8    o    o 

Ross'    Rapid    Symmetrical    Lens 

8x5 5  15    o 

Leather  Case ...      i  15    o 

Tripod  Stand 0180 

£16  8  0 

Camera  10x8 £11    5    o 

Dallmeyer's     Rapid      Rectilinear 

Lens  10x8 900 

Leather  Case 250 

Tripod  Stand i    8    o 

£23 18  0 


Camera  8£x6J          .........  £g    5    o 

Dallmeyer's     Rapid      Rectilinear 
Lens  8£x6£  .........      700 

Leather  Case  ............      200 

Tripod  Stand  ............      140 


£19  9  O 

A0WW 

Camera  12x10  .........  £15    o    o 

Dallmeyer's      Rapid     Rectilinear 
Lens  12x10  ............     n    o    o 

Two  Leather  Cases    .........      400 

Tripod  Stand  ............      i  12    o 

£31  12  O 


Chemical  Cases  with  supply  of  Materials  for  Printing,  Dishes,  &c.,  for  the  ahove  Sets, 
from  £2  to  £8. 

10    PER    CENT.    DISCOUNT    FOR    CASH    W)TH    ORDER. 

(Jr|r  For  Prices  of  Double- Swing  Action,  Extending  Fronts,  and  Brass 

Binding  Cameras,  see  opposite  page. 
DRY  PLATES  OF  ALL  MAKERS  AT  THEIR  LIST  PRICES. 

ILLUSTBATED  CATALOGUES  POST  FEEE. 

MANUFACTORY— 21,  Sonttaflton  ROI ,  High  Worn,  London,  W.C. 

[See  opposite  page. 


FIELD  and  STUDIO  CAMERAS  and  STUDIO  STANDS 

Have   received   the   Highest   Awards  wherever  Exhibited. 

'  The  Cameras  of  MKAGHKR  deserve  special  Examination,  as  well  for  the  perfection  of  their 
workmanship  as  for  their  perfect  adaptation  to  the  purposes  for  which  they  are  designed.'— 
Vide  Report  of  Jurors,  Class  IX.,  International  Exhibition,  Paris. 


MEAGHER'S 


CAMERA, 


Fig-  2.  Fig.  3. 

This  Camera  is  Light,  Portable,  and  quickly  set  up  ready  for  use,  and  is  perfectly  rigid 
when  extended.  Fig.  2  shows  the  Camera  packed  up. 

Fig.  3  shows  the  Camera  with  Reversing  Frame  and  Front  extended.  Each  Camera  is 
supplied  with  two  Fronts,  which  can  be  raised  or  lowered  as  required. 

Specially  constructed  for  use  with  Dry  Plates.  It  is  fitted  with  Single  or  Double  Action 
Swing  Back,  and  the  focussing  is  effected  by  Screw  or  Rack  Adjustment.  Prices,  with  Single 
Swing  Back,  Reversing  Frame,  and  three  Double  Backs,  each  carrying  two  Prepared  Plates,  and 
up  to  8.J  x  6J  the  Cameras  arc  fitted  with  removable  centre  partition  for  Stereoscopic  work. 


SIZE. 

Double  Swing          Brass  Binding      Extending  Front 
Back  extra.                   extra.            (as  Fig.  3.)  extra. 

6^X   4jj 

M 

16 

0 

60  15 

o 

£1        0 

0 

*1 

0     O 

7^X   5 

8 

0 

0 

0    15 

0 

i     8 

O 

I 

c     o 

8£x   6| 

9 

5 

0 

o  15 

o 

i     8 

0 

I 

*5    o 

10   X  8 

ii 

5 

0 

I      0 

0 

i  13 

0 

2 

0     0 

12   X10 

15 

0 

0 

i    5 

o 

2      0 

O 

3 

0     0 

15   X12 

19 

10 

0 

I    10 

o 

2    12 

0 

4 

10     0 

c^-iwfl: 

El 

\,  -A. 

O-A.SIE 

S  - 

( 

JJX4f 

7i  x  5                  8 

k  X  6J 

10  x  8 

Waterproof  Canvas     .. 

d"° 

8    6 

...  ^ 

o  10    o    ...  £0 

12      0      ...  ^ 

o  14    o 

Ditto       Stiff 

i 

0      0 

... 

I      I      0      ...      I 

4    o    ... 

i     6    o 

Solid  Leather  ... 

. 

I 

12      6 

... 

I    15      0      ...      2 

0      0      ... 

250 

For  Prices  of  larger  sizes  see  Illustrated  Catalogue. 

Manufacturer  to  H.  M.  Government,  Science  and  Art  Dept.,  South  Kensington, 

War  Office,  Woolwich  Arsenal,  Ordnance  Survey,  Southampton,  School  of  Military 

Engineering,  Chatham,  and  various  Stations  throughout  the  World. 

The  Wood  used  in  the  manufacture  of  the  above  Cameras  is  carefully  prepared  and  selected 
from  a  well-seasoned  stock,  averaging  50,COO  feet,  cut  into  the  various  thicknesses  required. 

A  large  number  of  satisfactory  Testimonials  have  been  received  from  Amateur  and  Pro- 
fessional Photographers  from  all  parts  of  the  world. 

Illustrated  Catalogues  Post  Free,    Ten  Per  Cent.  Discount  for  Cash  with  Order, 

MANUFACTORY:-21,  Southampton  Row,  High  Holm,  Won,  W.C. 

[See  opposite  page. 


The  Grand  Prix  and  Gold  Medal,  Exposition,  Paris,  1889. 
Council  Medal  and  Highest  Award,  Great  Exhibition,  London,  1851. 

Gold  Medal,  Paris  Expositon,  1867. 

Medal  and  Highest  Award,  Exhibition,  London,  1862. 

Medal  and  Diploma,  Centennial  Exhibition,  Philadelphia,  1876. 

Two  Gold  Medals,  Paris  Exhibition,  1878. 
Gold  Medal,  Highest  Award,  Inventions  Exhibition,  1885. 


Portrait  and  View  Lenses 


ARE    USED    BY    THE 


Leading  Professional  anil  Aiatenr  PMoOTte  HM  the  World. 
SPECIAL    NOTICE. 

BOSS  &  CO.  beg  to  announce  that  they  have  been  engaged  for  several 
years  past  in  calculations  and  experiments  with  the  new  Jena  Optical 
Glass,  with  the  result  that  they  are  now  introducing  several  new  series  of 
Landscape  and  Portrait  Lenses,  which  will  be  found  of  greater  excellence 
and  more  aplanatic  than  the  Lenses  of  the  same  class  hitherto  supplied, 
which  have  been  so  popular  with  Professional  and  Amateur  Photo- 
graphers in  the  past. 

ROSS'  IMPROVED  CAMERAS  AND  APPARATUS. 

FOR  STUDIO  AND  FIELD.      ALL  SIZES  IX  STOCK. 


DRY-PLATE  OUTFITS  COMPLETE. 


IMPROVED    HAND-CAMERAS. 


SEND   FOR  FULL   DESCRIPTIVE  AND   PRICED   CATALOGUE 

TEN   PER    CENT.  Discount  when  Remittance  accompanies  Order. 

ROSS  &  CO.,  Opticians,  112,  New  Bond  Street,  London,  W. 

M AN U FACTO RY-3,    CLAPHAM    COMMON,    S.W. 


THE  "FERNANDE"  BURNISHER, 


O       a-S3 


w 


Q^     Hrt       i 

§3  -ill 

*2»5- 


o  a  JLJBI^w-  1^.^  _•»«•.        a  s  1 1 1  * 

la  3  3  •S  a 

flllll 

"  9  and  10,  BAKER  STREET,  W.,  March  iSth,  1890. 

"  DEAR  SIR,— The  i4-inch  Burnisher  you  sent  me  is  perfect.  I  am  more  than  pleased  with 
it ;  so  simple  and  free  from  scratches,  a  child  may  use  it.  I  am  very  glad  to  possess  it.  You 
may  refer  anyone  to  me,  I  have  such  confidence  in  it. 

"Yours  truly,  THOS.  FALL." 

"HYDE,  I.W.,  $th  June,  1890. 

"  DEAR  SIR,— The  two  i4-inch  '  Fernande '  Burnishers  you  supplied  to  my  studios  at  Regent 
Street,  London,  and  Southsea  answer  so  well  that  I  must  have  a  third  one  for  Ryde.  Please 
send  one.  "Yours,  &c.,  A.  DEBENHAM." 

"210,  TUFNELL  PARK  RD.,  N.,  March  nth,  1891. 

"DEAR  SIR,— I  consider  the  'FERNANDE'  a  great  boon.  Every  photographer  should  have 
one.  Those  that  are  without  one  are  decidedly  behind  the  times,  and  don't  know  what  a  treat 
they  miss.  "  Yours,  &c.,  G.  W.  SECRETAN." 

FORMSTECHER'8  DOUBLE  ALBUMENI8ED  PAPER. 

WHATMAN   ROUGH    SURFACE   PAPER. 

FOR  PLATINUM  OR  GOLD  TONING. 

MR.  DUNMORE,  in  British  Journal,  March  ajth,  says : — "  This  paper  is  an  admirable  example 
of  what  a  rough  sensitised  surface  should  be.  Almost  any  colour,  from  a  cool  grey  to  a  rich 
sepia,  is  readily  obtained." 


Dr.  HeseUefs  Pizzighelli  and  "  Thula "  Papers. 
OR.  SCHLEUSSNER'S  DRY  PLATES.       LINDNER'S  BERLIN  MOUNTS, 

BACKGROUNDS. 
Photogravure,  Copperplate,  &  Collotype  Printing. 

BEST    HAND-WORK    ONLY. 

BURNT-IN     PHOTOS    ON     CHINA    A    SPECIALITY. 

Sole  Agent  for  Great  Britain  and  Colonies : — 

3,    Gruildhall   Chambers,    London,    E.G. 


ILTJND    &    CO.'S 

PUBLICATIONS. 


Paper  Boards,  86  pages,  I/-  ;    Cloth,  1/6. 

Photography   as   a   Business.     By  H.  P. 

ROBINSON.  To  the  novice  commencing  business  this  practical 
manual  is  indispensable.  It  should  also  be  in  the  hands  of  a11 
who  desire  to  improve  their  business  and  mature  their  resources. 
Twelve  chapters;  with  Frontispiece. 

PRINCIPAL  CONTENTS  :— Amateurs  and  the  Profession — Qualifications.  Natural  and  Acquired 
—The  Education  of  a  Professional  Photographer— The  Premises— The  Studio— Purchasing  a 
Business — Payments— Proofs — Resittings — Pi  ices — Boob -keeping — festering  Negatives — Adver- 
tising—Out-door  Work— Home  Portraiture— Old  Negatives  — Management  of  the  Sitter— 
Retouching — Exhibiting — Selling  the  Business — Copyright — &c.,  &c. 

Strongly  Bound,  10/6. 

The    Studio    Register.       A  ruled  and  printed 
book  for  the  studio,  with  columns  for  entering  work  in  hand, 
particulars,  price,  when  delivered,  &c.     No  business-like  photo- 
grapher should  be  without  one.     Specimen  page  post  free. 
4to,  200  Leaves,  Half  Bound,  6/-. 

Colouring    Instruction    Bopk.     Valuable 

wherever  colouring,  whether  of  small  portraits  or  enlargements, 
is  undertaken.  Space  is  provided  for  Number,  Date,  Price,  Name 
and  Address,  Colour  of  Eyes,  Hair,  Complexion,  Jewellery,  Dress, 
and  Remarks.  The  page  contains  eight  instruction  forms,  and 
each  alternate  page  is  perforated,  so  that  the  forms  can  be  torn 
out  one  at  a  time.  On  the  unperforated  page  a  copy  is  taken  by 
means  of  carbon  duplicating  paper,  so  that  the  instructions  can  be 
referred  to  at  any  time. 

6£  in.  by  5  in.  (oblong),  52  pages,  8d. 

Payment  Entry  Book  for  Photographers'  Agents 
and  Canvassers.  Ruled  for  use  by  collectors  on  the  club  weekly 
payment  system. 

Monthly,  Id.     April,  August,  and  December,  Double  Numbers,  2d.     Post  free, 
2/-  per  annum.     Colonies  and  India,  3/6  per  annum. 

The  Practical  Photographer.  The  Inter- 
national Magazine.  "Widely  read  wherever  Photography  is 
practised  and  English  understood.  Treating  of  matters  of  interest 
to  Manufacturer,  Dealer,  Photographer,  and  Amateur.  Never 
less  than  24  pages  of  reading  matter.  Profusely  illustrated. 

THE  COUNTRY  PRESS,  BRADFORD,  &  LUD8ATE  CIRCUS,  LONDON,  E.G. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  WORKS 


BY 

siixnsoixr. 


Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  Id. 

"Letters  on  Landscape  Photography." 

PIPER  &  CARTER,  5,  FURNIVAL  STREET,  HOLBORN,  B.C. 
Price  2s.  6d.,  per  post  2s.  Sd. 

"  Pictorial  Effect  in  Photography." 

PIPER  &  CARTER,  5,  FURNIVAL  STREET,  HOLBORN,  E.G. 
Price  2s.  6d.,  per  post  2s.  Sd. 

"The  Studio;    and  What  to  Do  in  It." 

PIPER  &  CARTER,  5,  FURNIVAL  STREET,  HOLBORN,  B.C. 
Price  2s.  Qd.,  per  post  2s.  Sd. 

4i  Picture  Making  by  Photography." 

HAZELL,  WATSON,  &  VI  NET,  LTD.,  1,  CREED  LANE,  LUDGATE  HILL. 
Paper  Boards,  86  pages,  Is. ;   Cloth,  Is.  6d. 

"  Photography   as   a  Business." 

To  the  novice  commencing  business  this  practical  manual  is  indis- 
pensable.    It  should   also   be   in   the   hands   of  all   who   desire   to 
improve  their  business  and  mature  their  resources.     Twelve  chapters ; 
with  Frontispiece. 

THE  COUNTY  PRESS,  BRADFORD,  &  LUDGATE  CIRCUS,  LONDON,  E.G. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLICATIONS, 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  NEWS.  A  Weekly  Kecord  of  the  Progress  of 
Photography.  Published  every  Friday,  price  2d. ;  post  free  within  the  United 
Kingdom,  2£d.  Annual  Subscription,  payable  in  advance,  by  post  (to  all  parts 
of  the  United  Kingdom),  10s.  10d.;  or  per  quarter,  2s.  9d.  ADTERTISKMENT 
SCALE:— Five  lines  and  under  (average  7  words  to  line),  3s. ;  each  additional 
line,  4d.  Revised  Scale  of  Small  PREPAID  Advertisements 

(of  four  lines)  of  the  following  classes:— Situations  Wanted  or  Offered,  Photo- 
graphic Businesses  to  be  Let  or  Sold,  ONE  SHILLING  ;  each  additional  line 
6d.  extra. 

YEAR-BOOK  OF  PHOTOGRAPHY  AND  PHOTOGRAPHIC  NEWS 
ALMANAC.  Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  3d.  A  few  copies  remain  on  hand  for 
the  years  1871,  1875, 1877-1881,  and  1886-1891. 

ABOUT    PHOTOGRAPHY    &    PHOTOGRAPHERS.      By  H.  BADEN 

PRITCHARD,  F.C.S.    Price  2s.,  per  post  2s.  2d. 

A  TRIP    TO   THE   GREAT   SAHARA  WITH   A   CAMERA.     By  A 

COCKNEY.    Price  6d.,  post  free,  6£d. 

BURTON'S  MODERN  PHOTOGRAPHY.  Comprising  Practical 
Instructions  in  Working  Gelatine  Dry  Plates.  By  Prof.  W.  K.  BURTON,  C.B. 
Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  2d. 

BURTON'S  POCKET  BOOK  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHERS:  Including  the 

usual  space  for  Notes,  &c.,  with  Tables  for  Facilitating  Exposures.  Price, 
paper  covers,  9d.,  per  post  10d. ;  cloth  Is.,  per  post  Is.  Id. 

OPTICS  FOR  PHOTOGRAPHERS.  By  Professor  W.  K.  BURTON. 
Reprinted,  with  corrections  and  additions,  from  a  series  of  articles  in  the 
Photographic  News.  Profusely  illustrated,  and  giving  full  instructions, 
based  on  experience,  in  the  use  of  photographic  lenses,  together  with  the 
theoretical  considerations  involved.  Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  2d. 

BEGINNER'S  GUIDE  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY ;  Showing  how  to  Buy  a 
Camera  and  how  to  Use  it.  By  A  FELLOW  OF  THE  CHEMICAL  SOCIETY.  Price 
6d.,  per  post  7£d. 

LANDSCAPE  PHOTOGRAPHER'S  POCKET  NOTE-BOOK.  Arranged 
for  entry  of  date,  light,  process,  lens,  and  stop  used,  number  of  seconds,  time 
of  day,  name  of  place,  and  remarks.  Price  6d.,  per  post  7d. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRINTER'S  ASSISTANT.  By  WILLIAM  HEIGHWAY. 
Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  Id. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLICATIONS-^^. 

PEACTICAL  PORTRAIT  PHOTOGRAPHY.  A  Hand-book  for  the 
Dark  Boom,  the  Skylight,  and  the  Printing  Boom.  By  the  same  Author. 
Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  l^d. 

ESTHETICS  OF  PHOTOGRAPHY.  By  the  same  Author.  Being 
Hints  on  Posing  and  Lighting  the  Sitter.  Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  IJd. 

HANDBOOK     OP     PHOTOGRAPHIC     TERMS.      An     Alphabetical 

arrangement  of  the  Processes,  Formulae,  Applications,  &c.,  of  Photography 
for  Beady  Beference.  Compiled  by  WILLIAM  HEIGHWAY.  Price  2s.  6d.,  per 
post  2s.  8d. 

ELEMENTARY    LESSONS    IN    SILVER   PRINTING.      By   W.  M. 

ASHMAN.  Bevisedand  reprinted  from  the  PHOTOGRAPHIC  NEWS,  with  additions 
to  date.  Price  Is.  6d.,  per  post  Is.  8d. 

ELEMENTARY  TREATISE  ON  PHOTOGRAPHIC  CHEMISTRY.    By 

ARNOLD  SPILLER.  Reprinted  from  the  Photographic  News.  Price  6d.,  per 
post  6£d. 

THE  MAGIC  LANTERN ;   ITS   CONSTRUCTION  AND  USE.    By  A 

FELLO  w  OF  THE  CHEMICAL  SOCIETY.    Price  6d. 

THE  EVOLUTION  OF  PHOTOGRAPHY,  with  a  Chronological  Record 

of  Discoveries,  Inventions,  &c. ,  Contributions  to  Photographic  Literature, 
and  Personal  Beminiscences  extending  over  Forty  Years.  By  J.  Verge. 
Illustrated.  Price  5s.,  per  post  5s.  4d. 

PHOTOGBAPHIC    HANDY-BOOKS— No.  I. 
INSTRUCTION  in  PHOTOGRAPHY.     Capt.  ABNET,  C.B.,  R.E.,  F.R.S- 

Eighth  Edition,  corrected  to  date,  considerably  enlarged,  and  profusely  illus- 
trated. Price  3s.  6d.,  per  post  3s.  lOd.  "  The  standard  manual  of  the  English 
photographic  practitioner." 

PHOTOGRAPHIC    HANDY-BOOKS— No.  II. 
PHOTOGRAPHY  with  EMULSIONS.     Capt.  ABNET,  C.B.,  R.E.,  P.R.S. 

The  Work  will  be  found  useful  alike  to  beginners  and  experts .  All  th  e  processe s 
are  described  in  such  a  practical  way  as  tobe  easily  comprehensible.  Price  3s., 
per  post  3s.  3d. 

PHOTOGBAPHIC    HANDY-BOOKS— No.  III. 

PICTORIAL  EFFECT  IN  PHOTOGRAPHY.  Being  Hints  on  Composi. 
tion  and  Chiaroscuro  for  Photographers.  By  H.  P.  BOBINSOJI.  With 
numerous  illustrations.  Price  2s.  6d.,per  post  2s.  8d. 

PHOTOGBAPHIC    HANDY-BOOKS— No.  IV. 
THE  ART  AND   PRACTICE    OF   SILVER  PRINTING.     By  H.  P. 

BOBINSON  and  CAPT.  ABNEY,  C.B.,  B.E.,  F.B.S.    Price  2s.  6d.,  per  post  2s.  8d. 


PHOTOGRAPHIC  PUBLICATIONS-continued. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC)  HANDY-BOOKS— No.  VI. 

THE  STUDIO;    AND  WHAT  TO  DO  IN  IT.     By  H.  P.  KOBINSON. 

Price  2s.  6d.,  per  post  2s.  8d. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC    HANDY-BOOKS— No.  VIII. 

PHOTO-MICROGRAPHY ;  Or,  How  to  Photograph  Microscopic  Objects. 
By  I.  H.  JENNINGS.  Also,  A  CHAPTER  ON  PREPARING  B10TBBIA.  By 
Dr.  R.  L.  MADDOX.  Price  3s.,  per  post  3s.  2d.  , 

PHOTOGRAPHIC    HANDY-BOOKS— No.  IX. 

LETTERS  ON  LANDSCAPE  PHOTOGRAPHY.  By  H.  P.  ROBINSON. 
Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  Id. 

A  CASKET  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  GEMS.     A  Collection  of  500  Dodges, 

Receipts,  Entertaining  Experiments,  &c.,  in  connection  with  the  Art  of  Photo- 
graphy and  its  branches.  Collected,  Classified,  and  Arranged  for  ready  reference 
by  W.  INGLKS  ROGERS.  Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  2d. 

RECENT  ADVANCES  IN  PHOTOGRAPHY.  Being  the  Cantor  Lec- 
tures for  1882.  By  Capt.  ABNKY,  C.  B.,  R.E.,  F.R.S.  Reprinted,  with  additional 
matter,  from  the  Journal  of  the  Society  of  Arts.  Price  6d.,  per  post  6Jd. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC  PRIMERS.  BY  CAPT.  ABNEY,  C.B.,  R.E.,  F.R.S. 
No.  1.— NEGATIVE  MAKING.  Price  Is.,  per  post  Is.  l£d. 

ART  OF  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PAINTING.  By  A.  H.  BOOL.  Price  Is., 
per  post  Is.  Id. 

ENAMELLING  AND  RETOUCHING.  A  Practical  Photographic 
Treatise.  By  P.  PIQUBPE.  Price  2s.  6d.,  per  post,  2s.  8d. 

THE   SPECTROSCOPE   AND   ITS   RELATION  TO  PHOTOGRAPHY. 

By  C.  RAY  WOODS.     Price  6d.,  per  post  7d. 

SANITARY  HINTS  TO  PHOTOGRAPHERS.  By  DR.  HENRI  NAPIAS, 
Medical  Adviser  to  the  French  Photographic  Benevolent  Society.  Translated 
from  the  Momteur  de  la  Photographic.  Price  2d.,  per  post  2£d. 


PIPER    &    CARTER, 

Irhrters,  |)nblwj[trs,  $  ^bteiismg 

5,  FURNIVAL  STREET,  HOLBORN,  E.G. 


J.  R.  GOTZ, 

19,  Buckingham  St.,  Strand,  London,  W.G. 

SOLE    WHOLESALE    CONSIGNEE    OF    THE 

OBERNETTER  EMULSION  PAPERS, 

Obernetter  Portrait  Paper. 
Obernetter  Brilliant       „ 
Obernetter  Chlorotype. 


STJE.FA.OE. 

HIGHLY  ARTISTIC  PRINTS  are   obtained  with 

this  Paper,  which  is  now  used  in  some  of  the  leading 

Studios  both  in 

ENGLAND  and  on  the  CONTINENT. 

The  Prints  may  be  considered  PERMANENT,  more 
so   than   with  ANY  other  Process  —  proper   treatment 

provided. 

FOR  PRICES,  INSTRUCTIONS,  ETC.,  WRITE  TO  ABOVE  ADDRESS. 


SUTER'S  APLANATIC  LENSES, 

The  NEW  POBTBAIT  APLANATIC,  Aperture  F/5-5  (the  first  Series  made 
of  the  New  Jena  Silicate  Glass)  has  superseded  the  Portrait  Lens. 

FOR   CATALOGUES,  WRITE  TO— 

J.  R.  GOTZ,  19,  Buckingham  St.,  Strand,  London. 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


IAN 


J-  I 

Has  obtaii 

CASH, 

20,  For  Cb 
30 

IB, 

IB  Long, 
2B, 
2B  Paten 
3B      „ 
4B     „ 

NEWIU 

OBDE 
1A,  for 
dia. 
2A,for  < 

3A,  for 
4in. 
4A,forl 
dia. 
5A,  for 
5in. 
6A,  for 
6in, 

PORT 
3D,  Poi 
dia 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below, 
or  on  the  date  to  which  renewed.  Renewals  only: 
Tel.  No.  642-3405 
Renewals  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  date  due. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 

USES: 

S'.ONLY 
£4    4 

Bf  tJ*f* 

lo.    5     5 
a.  £5    6 
lo.      6     6 

v     -. 

INTERLIRRA&Y  mAki 

V.TENT), 

it  of  doors, 

us-     Setting  .     . 
in     £3  15 

JAN  21 

? 

"'      510 

o       '     ^ 

AUG  1  2  1983 

"*   MOV  ^    1999 

-»i          15     ° 

„     20    0 

,„    27    0    ( 
„     32    0    ( 

^.B,  (PATENT) 
nations.  Syi. 

ttc.cm.JULUW              ••••*» 

1            7  10    fl 

I 

^  »     10  10    § 
J  ',!    20    0    0 

4D,  Po 
dia 
5D,Po 
die 
6D,Po 
dii 
7D,Po 
di: 
8D,P< 
di 

Patenl 
Ditto, 
No.l, 
tion 
No.  2, 
Beet. 

NEW 
No. 

i"  ' 

2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 

^Ol/  a 
v  (i  ,- 

iPE'LENSr 
-—re  and  simple. 

'*# 

AUTO  DISC  CIRC 

OCT27'93 

a.       £350 
|    315    0 
4  10    0 

5  10    0   ;; 

APR 

2  3  T998 

7    0    0-|p- 
8  10    0 
9  10    0  - 

10  10    0 

14  o   o  ; 

;              19     0      0     ; 

i^pE    LENS 

LD21A-40m-8,'71 
(P6572slO)476-A-32 

Gfcby   4|  in.     l|w>.     °|m- 

fftlllilP 

15  ^   12    „      2|  „      M    „ 
18    „  IJ    „      «    »      g    » 
22    ..  20    ,,       off  <«      °^    »». 
_^—  -  —  IriTDiap 
DALLMEYER<'0 

General  Library 

id  Views.             J; 

9  in.  £4  10    i=: 

"    \l  "     ?  io    ( 

"•  S»  !9iiS  \ 
:  S:  »A.« 

11  8    i  7Y?;  «« 

"  "  '      a  ::  "  -  f 
»V:   i  a:s:a 

. 

26, 


OXFOBD    STREET, 


m 

yV4feB%B% 
tl  II 

II 
•    ^rB»BBF 


YB  27624 


U.  C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


1O-7S       ----  . 


I  12    YEARS'    SALES 

jiach    larger    than    its    predecessor) 

I  •••L 

'Hi         7495901 


totj  ;es 

t«  "  3ir 

Prj|  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

TT, 


t 


ey  use  more  ILFOKDS  than  ever 
ay  did  ;  more  than  all  other  Brands. 


RITANNIA  WORKS  -CO, 

K      Ilford,  London,  E.